Oracle® Banking Supply Chain

Finance
Supply Chain Finance User Guide

Release 14.7.3.0.0
F93593-02
February 2024
Oracle Banking Supply Chain Finance Supply Chain Finance User Guide, Release 14.7.3.0.0

F93593-02

Copyright © 2020, 2024, Oracle and/or its affiliates.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and
disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or
allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit,
perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation
of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find
any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software, software documentation, data (as defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulation), or related
documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, then
the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs (including any operating system, integrated software, any
programs embedded, installed, or activated on delivered hardware, and modifications of such programs) and Oracle
computer documentation or other Oracle data delivered to or accessed by U.S. Government end users are "commercial
computer software," "commercial computer software documentation," or "limited rights data" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, reproduction,
duplication, release, display, disclosure, modification, preparation of derivative works, and/or adaptation of i) Oracle
programs (including any operating system, integrated software, any programs embedded, installed, or activated on
delivered hardware, and modifications of such programs), ii) Oracle computer documentation and/or iii) other Oracle
data, is subject to the rights and limitations specified in the license contained in the applicable contract. The terms
governing the U.S. Government's use of Oracle cloud services are defined by the applicable contract for such services.
No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not
developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk of
personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all
appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle®, Java, MySQL, and NetSuite are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.

Intel and Intel Inside are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used
under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Epyc, and the AMD logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and
services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all
warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an
applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss,
costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth
in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents
Preface
Purpose vii
Audience vii
Documentation Accessibility vii
Diversity and Inclusion viii
Related Resources viii
Conventions viii
Screenshot Disclaimer viii
Acronyms and Abbreviations viii
Basic Actions ix
Symbols and Icons x

1 Supply Chain Finance

2 Maintenance for Supply Chain Finance

2.1 System Parameters Maintenance 2-2
2.1.1 View System Parameters 2-2
2.2 Product Parameters Maintenance 2-11
2.2.1 Create Product Parameters 2-12
2.2.2 View Product Parameters 2-22
2.3 Program Parameters Maintenance 2-23
2.3.1 Create Program Parameters 2-23
2.3.2 View Program Parameters 2-34
2.4 Accounting Maintenance 2-35
2.4.1 Accounting Role 2-36
2.4.1.1 Create Account Role 2-36
2.4.1.2 View Account Role 2-37
2.4.2 Entry Codes 2-38
2.4.2.1 Create Account Entry Code 2-38
2.4.2.2 View Account Entry Code 2-40
2.4.3 Accounting Entries 2-41
2.4.3.1 Create Accounting Entries 2-41

iii
 2.4.3.2 View Account Entries 2-44
2.4.4 External Account Mapping 2-45
2.4.4.1 Create External Account Mapping 2-46
2.4.4.2 View External Account Mapping 2-47
2.4.5 Internal Account Mapping 2-48
2.4.5.1 Create Internal Account Mapping 2-49
2.4.5.2 View Internal Account Mapping 2-50
2.5 Alerts Maintenance 2-52
2.5.1 Alert Contact Details 2-52
2.5.1.1 Create Alert Contact Details 2-52
2.5.1.2 View Alert Contact Details 2-53
2.5.2 Alert Definition 2-55
2.5.2.1 Create Alert Definition 2-55
2.5.2.2 View Alert Definition 2-56
2.5.3 Alert Decisioning 2-57
2.5.3.1 Create Alert Decisioning 2-57
2.5.3.2 View Alert Decisioning 2-62
2.6 Charges Maintenance 2-64
2.6.1 Charge Code 2-64
2.6.1.1 Create Charge Code 2-64
2.6.1.2 View Charge Code 2-66
2.6.2 Charge Rule Maintenance 2-67
2.6.2.1 Create Charge Rule Maintenance 2-67
2.6.2.2 View Charge Rule 2-69
2.6.3 Charge Decisioning 2-70
2.6.3.1 Create Charge Decisioning 2-71
2.6.3.2 View Charge Decisioning 2-77
2.6.4 Charge Preferential Pricing 2-78
2.6.4.1 Create Charge Preferential Pricing 2-79
2.6.4.2 View Preferential Pricing 2-83
2.7 Insurance Maintenance 2-84
2.7.1 Create Insurance 2-84
2.7.2 View Insurance 2-86
2.8 Interest Maintenance 2-87
2.8.1 Interest Pricing 2-88
2.8.1.1 Create Interest Pricing 2-88
2.8.1.2 View Interest Pricing 2-91
2.8.2 Interest Rate Decisioning 2-93
2.8.2.1 Create Interest Rate Decisioning 2-93
2.8.2.2 View Interest Rate Decisioning 2-96
2.9 Limits Structure Maintenance 2-97
2.9.1 Create Limits Structure 2-97

iv
 2.9.2 View Limits 2-105

3 Finance Disbursement
3.1 Processing Disbursement Task 3-1

4 Finance Settlement
4.1 Initiate Finance Settlement 4-1
4.2 Processing Settlement Task 4-5

5 Transaction Reversal
5.1 Initiate Transaction Reversal 5-1
5.2 Processing Disbursement Reversal Task 5-5
5.3 Processing Settlement Reversal Task 5-26

6 Finance Amendment
6.1 Initiate Finance Amendment 6-1
6.2 Processing Amendment Task 6-8

7 Inquiries
7.1 Accounting Inquiry 7-1
7.2 Charge Inquiry 7-3
7.3 Finance Inquiry 7-6
7.4 Message Inquiry 7-7
7.5 Structure Limits Inquiry 7-9
7.6 Structure Limits Txn Inquiry 7-11

8 Batch Jobs
8.1 EOD Batch 8-1
8.2 Independent Batch 8-3

9 Process Codes

A Functional Activity Codes

v
Index

vi
Preface

• Purpose
• Audience
• Documentation Accessibility
• Diversity and Inclusion
• Related Resources
• Conventions
• Screenshot Disclaimer
• Acronyms and Abbreviations
• Basic Actions
• Symbols and Icons

Purpose
This guide is designed to help acquaint you with the Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance.
It provides an overview of the system, and guides you through the various steps involved in
setting up and providing the supply chain finance services for the customers of your bank.

Audience
This guide is primarily intended for the following user/user roles:

Table 1 Audience

Role Function
Back office executive Input functions for transactions
Back office managers/officers Authorization of functions
Product Managers Product definition and authorization

Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility
Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.

vii
 Preface

Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My
Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info
or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.

Diversity and Inclusion

Oracle is fully committed to diversity and inclusion. Oracle respects and values having a
diverse workforce that increases thought leadership and innovation. As part of our initiative to
build a more inclusive culture that positively impacts our employees, customers, and partners,
we are working to remove insensitive terms from our products and documentation. We are also
mindful of the necessity to maintain compatibility with our customers' existing technologies and
the need to ensure continuity of service as Oracle's offerings and industry standards evolve.
Because of these technical constraints, our effort to remove insensitive terms is ongoing and
will take time and external cooperation.

Related Resources
For more information, refer to the following resources:
• Oracle® Banking Common Core User Guide
• Oracle® Banking Security Management System User Guide
• Oracle® Banking Getting Started User Guide
• Receivables and Payables User Guide

Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:

Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an
action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables for which
you supply particular values.
monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs, code in
examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.

Screenshot Disclaimer
Personal information used in the interface or documents is dummy and does not exist in the
real world. It is only for reference purposes.

Acronyms and Abbreviations

The list of the acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide are as follows:

viii
 Preface

Table 2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description
OBSCF Oracle Banking Supply Chain Finance
SCF Supply Chain Finance
OBSCFCM Oracle Banking Supply Chain Finance and Cash Management
FCUBS FlexCube Universal Banking System
OBDX Oracle Banking Digital Experience
ELCM Enterprise Limits and Collateral Management
API Application Programming Interface
EOD End of Day
FIFO First In First Out
LIFO Last In First Out
HAFO Highest Amount First Out
LAFO Lowest Amount First Out
STP Straight Through Processing
PO Purchase Order
UI User Interface

Basic Actions
The basic actions performed in the screens are as follows:

Table 3 Basic Actions

Actions Description
New Click New to add a new record. The system displays a new record to
specify the required data. The fields marked with Required are
mandatory.
• This button is displayed only for the records that are already
created.
Save Click Save to save the details entered or selected in the screen.
Unlock Click Unlock to update the details of an existing record. The system
displays an existing record in editable mode.
• This button is displayed only for the records that are already
created.
Authorize Click Authorize to authorize the record created. A maker of the screen
is not allowed to authorize the same. Only a checker can authorize a
record.
• This button is displayed only for the already created records. For
more information on the process, refer Authorization Process.
Approve Click Approve to approve the initiated record.
• This button is displayed once you click Authorize.
Reject Click Reject to reject the initiated record.
• This button is displayed once you click Authorize.
Audit Click Audit to view the maker details, checker details of the particular
record.
• This button is displayed only for the records that are already
created.

ix
 Preface

Table 3 (Cont.) Basic Actions

Actions Description
Close Click Close to close a record. This action is available only when a
record is created.
Confirm Click Confirm to confirm the action performed.
Cancel Click Cancel to cancel the action performed.
Compare Click Compare to view the comparison through the field values of old
record and the current record.
• This button is displayed in the widget once you click Authorize.
View Click View to view the details in a particular modification stage.
• This button is displayed in the widget once you click Authorize.
View Difference only Click View Difference only to view a comparison through the field
element values of old record and the current record, which has
undergone changes.
• This button is displayed once you click Compare.
Expand All Click Expand All to expand and view all the details in the sections.
• This button is displayed once you click Compare.
Collapse All Click Collapse All to hide the details in the sections.
• This button is displayed once you click Compare.
OK Click OK to confirm the details in the screen.

Symbols and Icons

The list of symbols and icons available on the screens are as follows:

Table 4 Symbols and Icons - Common

Symbol/Icon Function
Minimize

Maximize

Close

Perform Search

Open a list

Date Range

Add a new record

x
 Preface

Table 4 (Cont.) Symbols and Icons - Common

Symbol/Icon Function
Navigate to the first record

Navigate to the last record

Navigate to the previous record

Navigate to the next record

Grid view

List view

Refresh

Click this icon to add a new row.

Click this icon to delete a row, which is already added.

Calendar

Alerts

Unlock Option

View Option

Reopen Option

Options

xi
 Preface

Table 4 (Cont.) Symbols and Icons - Common

Symbol/Icon Function
Tree View

Table View

Table 5 Symbols and Icons - Widget

Symbol/Icon Function
Open status

Unauthorized status

Rejected status

Closed status

Authorized status

Modification Number

xii
1
Supply Chain Finance

Overview
Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance is a comprehensive digitized end-to-end solution that
supports the full lifecycle of supply chain finance across receivables and payables, offering
supplier-centric and buyer-centric financing. The solution addresses each of the supply chain
processes from design through execution thereby enabling banks to optimize the working
capital and supply chain operations of their corporate customers. Its unique value lies in its
ability to provide the business with predefined processes and a world-class framework that
takes care of business risk and compliance needs.

Benefits
• Suppliers are paid early
• Buyers can extend their payment terms
• Financial Institutions get their fee income at less risk and less cost.
The Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance platform enables the interaction between all the
parties of the trade i.e., the suppliers, the buyers, and the bank. The finance provider, or the
bank settles supplier invoices in advance or on due date of the invoice, for a lower financing
cost than the suppliers’ own source of funds. When the finance provider extends finance, it can
be at the request of the supplier or at the request of the buyer by earmarking the credit limits of
the concerned party. Different SCF techniques for financing is employed depending on the
party requesting for finance.

Functionality
One of the core functionalities or the foundations of Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance is
the support for creation of flexible and parametrized programs with capability to link a buyer to
multiple suppliers, or a supplier to multiple buyers.
There are two types of supply chain finance programs:
• Supplier Centric Program - When the Supplier is a large corporate; then the buyer with
whom the supplier is dealing becomes the Counter Party/Spoke and the supplier
becomes the Anchor of the SCF program. This program is called as Supplier Centric
Program. The anchor onboards all his counter parties or spokes to the SCF program.
• Buyer Centric Program - When the Buyer is a large corporate; then the seller with whom
the buyer is dealing becomes the Counter party/spoke and buyer becomes the Anchor
of the SCF program. This program is called as Buyer Centric Program. The anchor
onboards all his counter parties or spokes to the SCF program.

Home: Dashboard
Successfully signing into the Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance application displays the
Dashboard as your home screen. It is a collection of various portlets that are displayed based
on your role and access rights. The Dashboard enables easy access and analysis of
transactional and static data through these interactive and contextual portlets. User can drag
and move different portlets, resize, auto adjust the size, and expand/collapse the portlet.

1-1
 Chapter 1

On starting the Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance system, the below login screen is
displayed:

Figure 1-1 Login

1. Specify your User Name and Password to access the application.

2. Click Sign In to log into application.
The Dashboard screen displays.

1-2
 Chapter 1

Figure 1-2 Dashboard

1-3
 Chapter 1

Figure 1-3 Dashboard (continued)

Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance Dashboard currently consists of the following
portlets for Supply Chain Finance :
• Facility Utilization: This widget classifies all facilities into three categories i.e., nearing
breach, breached, and under-utilized. The drilldown allows the user to view these
details at an entity level. There is an option to search and filter the details for a specific
entity also.
– Nearing Breach: When utilized amount is more than 85% of the sanctioned
amount.

1-4
 Chapter 1

– Breached: When utilized amount is greater than or equal to the sanctioned

amount.
– Under Utilized: When utilized amount is less than 20% of the sanctioned amount.
• Facilities Expiring: This widget lists all facilities nearing expiry or expired and offers a
drilldown at each entity level. The user can filter the facilities expired for a specific time
period, and facilities near expiry within the specific days.
• Top 5 Corporates: This widget displays information of the top five customers; with
respect to their total Receivables and Payables. On clicking the table icon at the top-
right, the graph populates the business volume data of the same top 5 customers in
tabular format.
• Aging of Invoices: This widget displays invoice aging information in the form of a
doughnut. The graph displays the invoice amount volume split as per aging buckets
which are configurable at the time of implementation i.e., 0-30 days, 30-60 days, and
so on. Range criteria can be defined with a maximum of 6 ranges. On clicking any of
the range buckets on the graph, a pop-up window appears with the list of corporates
whose invoices are due for that aging bucket and further clicking on the ‘+’ (expand)
icon beside corporate name launches the Receivables Inquiry screen with data of
supplier name, issue date, due date, etc., as per the selected date. Click the bar-chart
icon on the top-right corner to change the view from doughnut (default) to bar chart.
The user can also flip the widget to view the same details for aging of overdue
invoices.
• Finance Maturing: This widget displays the list of the invoice finances, purchase order
finances, and the total outstanding finances which are maturing each week in the form
of a trend line. While the default view is for the upcoming month, this time frame to can
be changed to view further details. The user can flip the widget to view the detailed list
of finances maturing. The user can the filter to view the finances for a specific
borrower.
• Top Borrowers: This widget is a bar graph which shows the top 5 borrowers for the
previous year and current year. Clicking the bar-chart for any borrower offers a
drilldown list of finances for the borrower.
• Top Defaulters: This widget displays the list of top defaulters for the previous and
current months.
• Transaction Status Details: Transactions are grouped product-wise into groups as
disbursed, partially settled, or fully settled for a specific date range, which is editable.
The user can select on any product to view further details of transaction for the
product.
• Invoices Raised: This widget displays the data for financed and non-financed
Invoices on monthly basis as a bar graph. On clicking the table icon on the top-right
corner, the same data is displayed in tabular format with financed/non-financed
invoices grouped into monthly buckets. On clicking the bar graph, the screen will pop-
up with corporate name and aggregated invoice amount and further clicking on the ‘+’
(expand) icon beside corporate name launches the Invoice Inquiry screen with data of
supplier name; ‘To Date’ and ‘From Date’ as per the selected date.
• Business Volume Trends: This widget displays the business trends (total receivables
and payables) of the previous six months including the current month based on historic
data. The trend line/bar graph is plotted based on the highs/peak.
• Payments – Invoice Recon: This widget provides a snapshot of the reconciliation
details of payments against the entity selected, i.e., invoice, cash flow, allocation, or
finance. Click the respective icons to view these details as a doughnut or as a line
graph. You can view the volume percentage of payment records that are manually
reconciled, auto-reconciled, partially reconciled, and unreconciled. Using the filter

1-5
 Chapter 1

options, you can select a specific customer and/or modify the date range. Click the
refresh icon to reset the data. If you have selected the line-graph option, you can click
on specific trend-line points where the Volume (Y) axis meets the Month (X) axis. A
pop-up window appears, displaying the names of the corporates and the count of
records for that particular month and the reconciliation status.
• Customer wise utilization trend: This widget gives a bird’s eye view of the utilization
for each program plotted for each month. The limit type and date range can be
selected from the filter option.
• Facility Wise Sanctioned Limit trend: This widget displays the sanctioned limit as a
trend-line plotted over the preceding the six months. The filter option allows the user to
select a specific entity and limit type along with time frame to plot this line.
• Upcoming Repayments: This widget displays the finance and interest payments that
are due in the next 7 days as a bar graph. Each day displays the finance payment
dues combined with the interest payment dues. A separate Interest payment due bar is
displayed only if the underlying finance is not matured. On clicking the bar graph, the
screen will pop-up with list of dues displaying the Finance Reference Number, Amount,
and the Borrower name. The filter option allows the user to filter based on the start
date, and currency
• Outstanding Pre-Shipment Finances: This widget displays the list of outstanding
pre-shipment finances in form of doughnut. The finances are displayed separately for
Finances with Linked Invoices (Eligible for Conversion to Post Shipment Finances) and
Finances without Linked Invoices. On clicking the doughnut, the screen will pop-up
with the list of finances displaying the Finance Reference No, Maturity Date, Total
Outstanding Amount, Program Name, Buyer Name, and Supplier Name. The filter
option allows the user to filter based on supplier, program, and buyer
• Settlement Trend for Pre-Shipment Finances: This widget displays the list of settled
pre-shipment finances in form of trend line plotted over the preceding six months by
default. The user can view the finances for 12 months. The settled finances are
displayed in the following categories; Settled Through Post-Shipment Disbursement,
Settled Through Invoice Payment, and Settled Through Direct Finance Payment. The
filter option allows the user to filter the finances based on the borrower
• SLA Status Summary: This widget displays the SLA status of the transactions in
three categories i.e., within SLA, nearing SLA, or breached SLA in form of doughnut.
You can flip the widget to view the list of transactions in a tabular format. The filter
option allows the user to filter the transactions based on the Customer Number,
Branch, Process Name, Date Range, and SLA Status.
Perform following actions on the Dashboard screen:
• To add more portlets, click the Add icon located at the top-right corner of the Dashboard.
• To remove a portlet, click the Remove icon located at the portlet’s top-right corner.
• To configure the portlet, click the Configure Tile located at the portlet’s top-left corner.
• To flip the portlet view, click the Flip Forward or Flip Back icon.
• To change the portlet’s position, click and hold the Drag to reorder icon at the portlet’s
bottom-center and then move portlet to the desired position.
• To apply filter on the portlet’s data, click the Filter icon to view the pop-up select filter
values.

1-6
2
Maintenance for Supply Chain Finance
This topic describes the maintenance of reference data to be set on day zero to use the Supply
Chain Finance module.
To enable the functioning of Supply Chain Finance application, certain reference data needs to
be set up on day zero. The user need to set up reference data like products, programs, limits,
charge details, interest pricing, etc. The user may also need to identify administrators to
perform admin related tasks (creating users, assigning tasks and functions to the users as per
their profile, etc.,).
Maintaining Core Reference Data
Certain core reference data is required to be set up for execution of Supply Chain Finance
transactions such as country list, currency, customer category, holiday list, list of financial
institutions/banks, branch, FX rates, and so on.
Refer the Oracle Banking Common Core User Guide for setting up core reference data.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• System Parameters Maintenance
This topic describes the information to view and modify the day-zero system parameters
for Supply Chain Finance module.
• Product Parameters Maintenance
This topic describes the information to create new products and set its attributes.
• Program Parameters Maintenance
This topic describes the information to create a new program for financing along with its
attributes.
• Accounting Maintenance
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting such as
account mapping, entry codes, roles, and accounting entries in Supply Chain Finance
system.
• Alerts Maintenance
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Alerts such as contact
details, definition, and decisioning in Supply Chain Finance system.
• Charges Maintenance
This topic describes the information to maintain the charges in Supply Chain system.
• Insurance Maintenance
This topic describes the information to maintain details of the insurance company from
where the banks intends to purchase insurance policies for covering the default risk of the
debtor/borrower corporate.
• Interest Maintenance
This topic describes the information to maintain the interest in Supply Chain Finance
system.
• Limits Structure Maintenance
This topic describes the information to configure limit structures by mapping various limit
types to appropriate entities.

2-1
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

2.1 System Parameters Maintenance

This topic describes the information to view and modify the day-zero system parameters for
Supply Chain Finance module.
This screen displays the day-zero system parameters which are setup during implementation.
This set up will be configured as part of Day 1 delivery of the application and can be modified
by the bank through a UI, if required. The system parameters are segregated into the following
data segments.
• Workflow Parameters
• Finance Parameters
• Dashboard Parameters
• Product Parameters
• Delinquency Parameters
• View System Parameters
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, or authorize the day zero
system parameters for Supply Chain Finance module.

2.1.1 View System Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, or authorize the day zero
system parameters for Supply Chain Finance module.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance. Under Maintenance, Click System Parameters.
2. Under System Parameters, click View System Parameters.
The View System Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-1 View System Parameters

3. Click Options icon and select Unlock to modify the records.

The System Parameters - Workflow Parameters screen displays.

2-2
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Figure 2-2 System Parameters - Workflow Parameters

4. On Workflow Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the workflow parameters.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-1 Workflow Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Limit Block – Finance Switch the toggle ON to enable limit blocking during finance
transactions.
Limit Utilization – Finance Switch the toggle ON to enable limit utilization and release during
finance transactions.
Limit Block – Invoice Switch the toggle ON to enable limit blocking during invoice
transactions.
Limit Utilization – Finance Switch the toggle ON to enable limit utilization and release during
invoice transactions.
Limit Type for Invoice Select the limit type required for invoice approval.
Approval The available options are:
• Credit Cover
• Invoice
• Assignment
FCI Enabled Switch the toggle ON to enable or disable the FCI integration.
External NPA Integration Switch the toggle ON to enable the NPA integration with external
system.
Lending System Switch the toggle ON to enable the Integration with lending system.
Integration
Invoke Lending System Switch the toggle ON to enable the Integration of EOD process with
EOD the Lending System.
Synchronous Account Switch the toggle ON to enable the account response as
Response synchronous.
Auto Auth – Refund Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto authorization required for
the refund transactions.
Synchronous Payment Switch the toggle ON to enable the payment response as
Response synchronous.
Liquidate Pre-Shipment Switch this toggle ON to enable the liquidation of pre-shipment
finances with Invoice finances where post-shipment finance is not identified for an invoice.
Payment †

2-3
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-1 (Cont.) Workflow Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pre-Shipment Finance Select the liquidation preference for the settlement of pre-shipment
Liquidation Preference finance.
The available options are:
• FIFO
• Invoice linked with PO and FIFO
• Invoice linked with PO
This field is mandatory if Liquidate Pre-Shipment finances with
Invoice Payment is enabled.
Incoming Payment Switch the toggle ON to enable the confirmation for the incoming
Confirmation Required payment.

Note:
† For existing implementations where pre-shipment finances exist, a new
parameter Liquidate Pre-Shipment finances for Invoice Disbursement is
introduced at the system level.

Note:
During version upgrade, the system will read the value of Liquidate Pre-Shipment
finances for Invoice Disbursement and update the data for Pre-Shipment
Finance Liquidation Preference and Liquidation Order for Auto Debit fields
in Post-shipment programs based on this maintenance in the System
Parameters. A migration script will be prepared for relevant Post-shipment
programs during upgrade.

5. Click Next button.

The System Parameters - Finance Parameters screen displays.

2-4
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Figure 2-3 System Parameters - Finance Parameters

6. On Finance Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the finance parameters.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-2 Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto-Initiate Finance Switch the toggle ON to enable the Auto-Initiation of the finance
disbursement transaction.
Preferred Disbursement Select the preferred disbursement mode for the finance transaction.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Disbursement Auto – Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto processing of the finance
Processing disbursement transaction.
Disbursement Auth Switch the toggle ON to enable the authorization required for the
Required disbursement of the finance transaction.
Minimum Finance Specify the minimum finance percentage of Invoice amount allowed
Percentage for financing.
Maximum Finance Specify the minimum finance percentage of Invoice amount allowed
Percentage for financing.
Minimum Tenor Days Specify the minimum tenor allowed for a finance.
Maximum Tenor Days Specify the maximum tenor allowed for a finance.
Stale Period Specify the stale period in days after which the invoice cannot be
financed any more. Stale period is calculated from Invoice date.
Multiple Disbursement Switch this toggle ON if multiple disbursement is allowed on same
invoice.

2-5
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-2 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto Populate PO Switch this toggle ON to auto populate the PO required.
Required
Credit Limit Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable the credit limits applicability to the
product.
Default Limit Exception Select the default exception handling for the Limit services.
Handling The available options are:
• Stop
• Skip
• Utilize
Sub Limit - Validate Expiry Switch the toggle ON to enable the Expiry date validation for the sub-
limits.
Recourse Switch the toggle ON to enable recourse for the program.
Allow Auto-Processing - Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto processing of disbursement
Overdue Borrower for Overdue borrower.
Allow Disbursement - NPA Switch the toggle ON to enable the disbursement for NPA borrower.
Borrower
Reversal Auto Processing Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto processing of finance
reversal transaction.
Reversal Auth Required Switch the toggle ON to enable the authorization required for the
reversal of the finance transaction.
Amendment Auto- Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto processing of finance
Processing amendment transaction.
Amendment Auth Switch the toggle ON to enable the authorization required for the
Required amendment of the finance transaction.
Validate Limits for Finance Switch this toggle ON to enable limits validation for finance
Amendment amendment transaction.
Maximum Records for Specify the maximum number of finance amendment requests that
Amendment Request can be raised.
Allow Back-Dated Switch the toggle ON to enable the back-dated disbursements.
Disbursements
Auto Settlement Switch the toggle ON to enable Auto-Initiation of the finance
Applicable repayment transaction.
Preferred Settlement Mode Select the preferred settlement mode for the finance transaction.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Settlement Auto – Switch the toggle ON to enable the auto processing of the finance
Processing repayment transaction.
Settlement Auth Required Switch the toggle ON to enable the authorization required for the
repayment of the finance transaction.
Prepayment Allowed Switch the toggle ON to enable the prepayment for the finance. i.e.,
Part, or full repayment before the finance due date.
Part Repayment Allowed Switch the toggle ON to enable the part repayment for the finance.
Minimum Waiting Period Specify the minimum period up to which the finance cannot be
closed. This should be enabled only if pre-closure is allowed.

2-6
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-2 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Maturity Date Calculation Select the finance maturity date calculation method.
The available options are:
• Business Date + Maximum Tenor
• Payment Due Date
• Invoice Due Date
• Invoice Due Date + Maximum Tenor
Finance Settlement on Switch the toggle ON to enable the underlying Finance repayment
Invoice Payment post the manual recon for the Invoice payment.
Interest Refund Select the type of payment for Interest Refund to be generated.
Generation on The available options are:
• Part Payment
• Full Payment
Excess Handling Select how excess payment made towards settling of outstanding
invoice/finance should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Reconcile
• Auto-Reconcile and Refund
• Manually-Reconcile
• Refund to beneficiary or payment party
Excess Refund Party Select the party to refund the excess amount.
The available options are:
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
• Payment Party
Appr Seq Before Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if the
payment is received before due date.
The available options are:
• I - Interest
• P - Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Valid Values – PIE, PEI, IPE, IEP, EIP, EPI
Excess Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the excess payment refund.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Appr Seq On Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if
payment is received on due date.
The available options are:
• I - Interest
• P - Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Valid Values – PIE, PEI, IPE, IEP, EIP, EPI

2-7
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-2 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Appr Seq After Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if
payment is received after due date.
The available options are:
• I - Interest
• P - Principal
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Valid Values – EOIP, EIOP, etc.,
NPA Appropriation Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if
Sequence payment is received after the finance has turned NPA.
The available options are:
• I - Interest
• P - Principal
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Valid Values – EOIP, EIOP, etc.,
Liquidation Order for Auto Specify the default auto-debit liquidation order to be applied in case
Debit partial funds are debited from the payment party on auto-debit.
The available options are:
• E - Penalty on Interest Outstanding
• O - Penalty on Principal Outstanding
• I – Monthly Interest Due
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent finances)
• F - Finance Due or Overdue (Outstanding Finances)
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.

7. Click Next button.

The System Parameters - Dashboard Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-4 System Parameters - Dashboard Parameters

8. On Dashboard Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the dashboard parameters.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-8
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-3 Dashboard Parameters - Field Description

Field Description
Customer Limit Trend Specify the date range for the customer limit trend in the dashboard.
Date Range
Customer Limit Trend Specify the month range for the customer limit trend in the
Default Months dashboard.
Facility Limit Trend Date Specify the date range for the facility limit trend in the dashboard.
Range
Facility Limit Trend Default Specify the month range for the facility limit trend in the dashboard.
Months
9. Click Next button.
The System Parameters - Product Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-5 System Parameters - Product Parameters

10. On Product Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the parameters for product
mapping between supply chain finance and the lending system.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-4 Product Parameters - Field Description

Field Description
Schedule Type Select the interest rate schedule.
The available options are:
• Normal
• Compounding
Reference Date Select the reference date for the interest schedule.
The available options are:
• Value Date
• Payment Date

2-9
 Chapter 2
System Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-4 (Cont.) Product Parameters - Field Description

Field Description
Interest Component Select the type of Interest component.
The available options are:
• Front Ended
• Rear Ended
Host Product Code Select the host product code to map individual supply chain products
to external product codes.
External Product Code Specify the product code defined in the Lending System.

11. Once you enter the details, click Add or click Reset to reset the fields, if required

a. Once an entry is made in the grid, click in the Action column, to Edit or Delete it.
b. Transactions created in the Oracle® Banking Supply Chain Finance application will be
mapped to the appropriate products in the lending application basis the above features
and mapping.

Note:
You can maintain only one record for a given combination of Schedule Type,
Reference Date, Interest Component, and Host Product Code.

12. Click Next button.

The System Parameters - Delinquency Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-6 System Parameters - Delinquency Parameters

13. On Delinquency Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the product parameters.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-10
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-5 Delinquency Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Delinquency Status Select the delinquency status as per the regulatory requirements.
Relevant statuses maintained in lending system gets populated here.
Example:
• NORM - Normal Status
• CAU - Caution
• WACH - Watch Status
Status Description Displays the description of the delinquency status selected.
Example:
• NORM - Normal Status
• NAB - Non-Accrual Basis
• WACH - Watch Status
Priority Displays the priority of the delinquency status selected.
Active Switch the toggle ON to enable the type of delinquency status as
Active depending on regulatory requirements.

14. Once you enter the details, click Add. or click Reset to reset the fields, if required

• Once an entry is made in the grid, click in the Action column, to Edit or Delete it.
15. Click Save & Close to save the record and send for authorization (if applicable).

Note:
If any flag in the system parameters is changed, the system promptly updates it
upon authorization. However, processing the impact of the flag takes
approximately 1-2 hours.

16. On the View System Parameters screen, click Options icon and then select any of the
following options:
a. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
b. View – To view the record details.

2.2 Product Parameters Maintenance

This topic describes the information to create new products and set its attributes.
Banks can create and categorize various products for financing.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Product Parameters
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create products and maintain its
parameters.

2-11
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

• View Product Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize product
records that have been created.

2.2.1 Create Product Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create products and maintain its parameters.
The product parameters are segregated into the following data segments.
• Basic Details
• Finance Parameters
• Repayment Parameters
• Credit Limit Mapping
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, Click Product Parameters. Under Product Parameters, Click
Create Product Parameters.
The Create Product Parameters - Basic Details screen displays.

Figure 2-7 Create Product Parameters - Basic Details

3. On Basic Details tab, specify the fields to configure the basic details for the product being
created.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-12
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-6 Basic Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch† Select the option under which the product is to be created.
• All - Product defined is applicable to all the branches.
• Allowed - Product defined is applicable to only the selected
branches.
• Restricted - Product defined is applicable to all the branches
except the selected branches.
You can select only one of the options at any given time.
Product Code Specify a unique code to identify the product.
Product Description Specify a description for the product.
Product Type Select whether the product is Buyer Centric or Supplier Centric.
Product Category Select the underlying instrument category, whether Invoice or
Purchase Order.
Effective From Click the Calendar icon to select the date from when the product is
active.
If the field is left blank, then the branch date is considered by default.
Expires On Click the calendar icon to select the date up to when the product is
valid.
Borrower Select the borrower to be associated with the product, whether
Anchor or Spoke.
Assignment Applicable Switch the toggle ON if assignment on invoice is applicable for
financing.
Auto Assignment Switch the toggle ON if the assignment is to be performed
automatically post invoice upload.
Acceptance Applicable Switch the toggle ON if acceptance on invoice is applicable for
financing.
Auto Acceptance Switch the toggle ON if the acceptance is to be performed
automatically post invoice upload.
Auto Acceptance (Days) Specify the number of days after which the instrument is
automatically deemed as accepted.
Credit Limit Applicable Switch the toggle ON to map credit limits to the product.
If you enable this toggle, the Credit Limit Mapping tab appears. You
can map the limit type and related entities.
Accounting Applicable Switch the toggle ON if accounting is applicable.

Note:
† On maintenance screens where product selection is required, only products
relevant to the logged-in user's branch will be displayed.

2-13
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Note:
For existing implementations where the application is used in a single branch, the
existing products can be mapped to either ALL or Allowed branch options at the
discretion of the bank or Financial Institution during upgrade to current release
version.
For existing implementations where the application is used in multiple branches,
the existing products must be mapped to respective branches under Allowed
branch option at the discretion of the bank or Financial Institution during upgrade
to current release version. Refer to Services Installation Guide for migration
support.

4. On selection of Allowed or Restricted branch type, the Allowed/Restricted Branches

section displays. Perform the below actions to add branch(es) for the product being
created.
a. Click Add to add a row.
b. In the Branch Code field, click Search.
The Branch Code pop-up screen displays.
c. Enter the partial or complete code/name of the branch in the respective fields.
d. Click Fetch. The relevant branch(es) appears.
e. Select the required branch.
f. Click Save in the Action column to save the row.
g. Click Edit in the Action column to edit the row or click Delete in the Action column to
delete the row.
5. Click Finance Parameters tab.
The Create Product Parameters - Finance Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-8 Create Product Parameters - Finance Parameters

6. On Finance Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the finance parameters for the
product being created.

2-14
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-7 Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto-Initiate Finance Switch the toggle ON to enable automated financing (Straight
Through Processing) of instruments such as invoices, debit notes,
and so on.
Preferred Disbursement Select the preferred mode of disbursement for this product.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is mandatory when Auto Initiate Finance is enabled.
Auto Settlement Switch the toggle ON to enable automated settlement (repayment)
Applicable † for this product.
Preferred Settlement Mode Select the preferred mode of settlement for this product.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Min. Finance (%) Specify the minimum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this product.
Max. Finance (%) Specify the maximum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this product.
Min. Tenor (Days) Specify the minimum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
product.
Max. Tenor (Days) Specify the maximum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
product.
Grace Days Specify the number of grace days.
This is the period post the finance due date, within which the finance
can be settled without penalty.
Stale Period (Days) Specify the number of stale days.
This is the period post the invoice date, after which the invoice
becomes stale and will not be financed automatically any more for
this product.
Min Waiting Period (Days) Specify the minimum period up to which the finance cannot be
closed for this product.
With Recourse Select Yes to specify that the finance is allowed with recourse, else
select No.
Assignment Amount Basis Select the assignment amount type for financing a transaction of this
product.
The available options are:
• Acceptance Amount
• Net Invoice Amount

2-15
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-7 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Min. Assignment (%) Specify the minimum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this product.
Max. Assignment (%) Specify the maximum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this product.
Disbursement Auth Switch the toggle ON to enable authorization for STP disbursement
Required transactions.
Disbursement Auto Switch the toggle ON to enable automatic processing of
Processing disbursement transactions.
Settlement Auth Required Switch the toggle ON to enable authorization for STP finance
settlement transactions.
Settlement Auto Switch the toggle ON to enable automatic processing of settlement
Processing transactions.
Amendment Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable amendment for this product.
Amendment Auth Switch the toggle ON to enable authorization for the finance
Required amendment transactions.
Amendment Auto Switch the toggle ON to enable automatic processing of finance
Processing amendment transactions.
Multiple Disbursement Switch the toggle ON to enable multiple finance disbursements for an
Allowed invoice.
Holiday Treatment for Select the day to consider if the finance disbursement falls on a
Future Funding holiday.
The available options are:
• Next Business Day
• Previous Business Day
Allow Back-Dated Switch the toggle ON to enable the back-dated disbursements for this
Disbursements product.

Note:
† Pre-Shipment settlement gets initiated only if the Auto Settlement Applicable
is enabled.

7. Click Repayment Parameters tab.

The Create Product Parameters - Repayment Parameters screen displays.

2-16
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Figure 2-9 Create Product Parameters - Repayment Parameters

8. On Repayment Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the repayment parameters
for the product being created.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-8 Repayment Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pre-Payment Allowed Switch the toggle ON if prepayment is allowed for finances availed
under this product, i.e., part, or full repayment before the finance due
date.
Part Payment Allowed Switch the toggle on if part payment is allowed for finances availed
under this product.
Maturity Date Calculation Select the basis for calculating the maturity date of the finance.
The available options are:
• Invoice option selected in Product Category:
– Invoice Due Date
– Business Date + Max Tenor
– Invoice Due Date + Max Tenor
– Payment Due Date
• PO option selected in Product Category:
– PO Date
– PO Date + Max Tenor
– Business Date + Max Tenor
Holiday Treatment Select the value if the maturity date falls on a holiday for this product.
The available options are:
• Next Business Date
• No Change
• Previous Business Date

2-17
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-8 (Cont.) Repayment Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

On Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if the
payment is received on due date.
The available options are:
• P – Principal Amount
• I – Interest Amount
• E – Penalty on Interest
Before Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if the
payment is received before due date.
The available options are:
• P – Principal Amount
• I – Interest Amount
• E – Penalty on Interest
After Due Date Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if the
payment is received after due date.
The available options are:
• P – Principal Amount
• I – Interest Amount
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E – Penalty on Interest
NPA Specify the appropriation sequence for the repayment amount if the
payment is received after the finance has turned NPA.
The available options are:
• P – Principal Amount
• I – Interest Amount
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E – Penalty on Interest
Reconciliation Towards Select whether the reconciliation is towards Invoice or Finance.
Auto Debit Applicable Switch the toggle ON if the account should be auto debited on the
finance due date for this product.
Liquidation Order for Auto Specify the default auto-debit liquidation order to be applied in case
Debit partial funds are debited from the payment party on auto-debit.
The available options are:
• E - Penalty on Interest Outstanding
• O - Penalty on Principal Outstanding
• I – Monthly Interest Due
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent finances)
• F - Finance Due or Overdue (Outstanding Finances)
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Debit Party On Due Date Select the party from whose account the amount should be debited.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Debit A/C. Type On Due Select the account Type to be debited.
Date The available options are:
• CASA
• OD A/C
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.

2-18
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-8 (Cont.) Repayment Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Debit Party After Due Date Select the party from whose account the amount should be debited,
if the business date is greater than finance maturity date for this
product.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Debit A/C. Type After Due Select the account type to be debited if the business date is greater
Date than finance maturity date for this product.
The available options are:
• CASA
• OD A/C
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Margin Handling Select how the margin should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Supplier
• Settle with Outstanding Finances
This field is displayed only if Product Category is selected as
Invoice in Basic Details tab.
Margin Payment Mode Select the mode of payment for the margin amount.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Margin Handling is selected as Refund
to the Supplier or Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier.
Interest Refund Handling Select how the interest refund should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to IBP
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Interest Bearing Party
• Settle with Outstanding Finances
Interest Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the interest refunds.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Interest Refund Handling is selected
as Refund to the Interest Bearing Party or Auto-Settle and
Refund to IBP.
Excess Handling Select how the excess payment made towards settlement of
outstanding invoice/finance, should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Reconcile
• Auto-Reconcile and Refund
• Manually-Reconcile
• Refund to beneficiary or payment party

2-19
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-8 (Cont.) Repayment Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Excess Refund Party Select the party to refund the excess amount to.
The available options are:
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
• Payment Party
Excess Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the excess payment refund.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT

9. Click Credit Limit Mapping tab.

The Create Product Parameters - Credit Limit Mapping screen displays.

Figure 2-10 Credit Limit Mapping

10. On Credit Limit Mapping tab, specify the fields to configure the credit limits for the
product being created. This tab is displayed only if Credit Limit Applicable is enabled in
the Basic Details tab.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-9 Credit Limit Mapping - Field Description

Field Name Description

Limit Event Select the event for which the limit is to be applied.
Transaction Event Select the transaction event for which the limit event is to be applied.
Entity Select the main entity for which the limit is to be applied.
Limit Type Select the type of limit.

2-20
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-9 (Cont.) Credit Limit Mapping - Field Description

Field Name Description

Sub Levels Applicable Select the applicable sub-level entities/nodes.
Recourse Select whether recourse is applicable.

11. Click Sub Level Exception Handling link to specify the exception handling behavior for
the sub-level entities/nodes.
The Sub Level Exception Handling pop-up screen displays.

Figure 2-11 Sub Level Exception Handling

12. On Sub Level Exception Handling screen, specify the fields to set the exception handling
behavior.
For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-10 Sub Level Exception Handling - Field Description

Field Name Description

Sub Levels Applicable Displays the selected sub-level entities/nodes.
Expired Limit Exception Select the exception handling behavior when the limit is expired.
Handling The available options are:
• Skip
• Stop
• Utilize
Breach Limit Exception Select the exception handling behavior when the limit is breached.
Handling The available options are:
• Skip
• Stop
• Utilize
Expired and Breach Limit Select the exception handling behavior when the limit is both expired
Exception Handling and breached.
The available options are:
• Skip
• Stop
• Utilize

• Select the required exception behaviors and click Ok to save the details.
13. Click Add/Edit to add the details to the grid.

14. Click Reset to clear the selected values, if required.

2-21
 Chapter 2
Product Parameters Maintenance

15. Perform the following steps to act on the records in the grid.

• Click Options icon in the Action column to edit or delete the row.
16. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization (if applicable).

2.2.2 View Product Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize product
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Product Parameters. Under Product Parameters, click View
Product Parameters.
The View Product Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-12 View Product Parameters

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Product Code,
Product Type, Product Category, Borrower, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.

2-22
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires

necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.3 Program Parameters Maintenance

This topic describes the information to create a new program for financing along with its
attributes.
A program is a linkage of a buyer to one or more suppliers or linkage of a supplier to one or
more buyers.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Program Parameters
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create products and maintain its
parameters.
• View Program Parameters
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize program
records that have been created.

2.3.1 Create Program Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create products and maintain its parameters.
The program parameters are segregated into the following data segments.
• Basic Information
• Finance Parameters
• Link Spokes
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, Click Program Parameters. Under Program Parameters, Click
Create Program Parameters.
The Create Program Parameters - Basic Information screen displays.

2-23
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Figure 2-13 Create Program Parameters - Basic Information

3. On Basic Information tab, specify the fields to configure the basic information for the
program being created.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-11 Basic Information - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Code Specify a unique code to identify the program.
Program Name Specify a name for the program.
Product † Select the underlying finance product to be associated with the
program.
Anchor Click the search icon to select the anchor for the program. An anchor
can be a customer or a non-customer.
Relationship Click the search icon to select the relationship associated with the
selected anchor.
Effective From Click the Calendar icon to select the date from when the program is
active.
If the field is left blank, then the branch date is considered by default.
Expires On Click the calendar icon and select the date up to when the program is
valid.
Reconciliation towards Select whether the reconciliation is towards Invoice or Finance.
Assignment Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable assignment on invoice applicable for
financing.
Auto Assignment Switch the toggle ON to enable assignment automatically post
invoice upload.
Acceptance Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable acceptance for invoice applicable for
financing
Auto Acceptance Switch the toggle ON to enable automatic acceptance of an
instrument for the program.

2-24
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-11 (Cont.) Basic Information - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto Acceptance (Days) Specify the number of days after which the instrument is
automatically deemed as accepted under this program.
This field is displayed only if Auto Acceptance Applicable is
enabled.
Two Factor Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable a two-factor system for the program
in case the anchor is trading with foreign buyers/suppliers.
Factoring Profile Select the profile for factoring as Import Factoring or Export
Factoring.
This field is displayed only if Two Factor Applicable toggle is
enabled.
Insurance Applicable Switch the toggle ON to enable insurance for the program.

Note:
† On maintenance screens where program selection is required, programs linked
to the products that are relevant to the logged-in user's branch gets displayed.

4. Click Finance Parameters tab.

The Create Program Parameters - Finance Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-14 Create Program Parameters - Finance Parameters

5. On Finance Parameters tab, specify the fields to configure the finance parameters for the
program being created.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-25
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-12 Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto-Initiate Finance Select Yes to enable auto financing under this program. Else select
No.
Preferred Disbursement Select the preferred mode of disbursement for this program.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is mandatory if Auto-Initiate Finance is enabled.
Auto Settlement Select Yes to enable automated settlement (repayment), under this
Applicable † program. Else select No.
Preferred Settlement Mode Select the preferred mode of settlement for this program.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Min. Finance (%) Specify the minimum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this program.
Max. Finance (%) Specify the maximum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this program.
Min. Tenor (Days) Specify the minimum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
program.
Max. Tenor (Days) Specify the maximum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
program.
Grace Days Specify the number of grace days.
This is the period post the finance due date, within which the finance
can be settled without penalty.
Stale Period (Days) Specify the number of stale days.
This is the period post the invoice date, after which the invoice
becomes stale and will not be financed automatically any more for
this program.
With Recourse Select Yes to specify that the finance is allowed with recourse, else
select No.
Disbursement Currency Select the currency in which the finance should be disbursed.
This field is mandatory when Auto-Initiate Finance is enabled.
Auto Debit Applicable Select Yes to enable auto debit to recover the outstanding finance
due from the borrower for this program. Else select No.
Liquidation Order for Auto Specify the default auto-debit liquidation order to be applied in case
Debit partial funds are debited from the payment party on auto-debit.
The available options are:
• E - Penalty on Interest Outstanding
• O - Penalty on Principal Outstanding
• I – Monthly Interest Due
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent finances)
• F - Finance Due or Overdue (Outstanding Finances)
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Disbursement Auth Select Yes to enable authorization for the disbursement transactions
Required under this program. Else select No.

2-26
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-12 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Disbursement Auto Select Yes to enable automatic processing of disbursement
Processing transactions under this program. Else select No.
Amendment Auth Select Yes to enable authorization for the amendment transactions
Required under this program. Else select No.
This field appears only if the Product selected has Amendment
Applicable enabled.
Amendment Auto Select Yes to enable automatic processing of amendment
Processing transactions under this program. Else select No.
This field appears only if the Product selected has Amendment
Applicable enabled.
Settlement Auth Required Select Yes to enable authorization for the settlement transactions
under this program. Else select No.
Settlement Auto Select Yes enable automatic processing of settlement transactions
Processing under this program. Else select No.
Interest Bearing Party Select the party that bears the interest.
The available options are:
• Anchor
• Spoke
Margin Handling Select how the margin should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Supplier
• Settle with Outstanding Finances
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Product Category selected as Invoice.
Margin Payment Mode Select the mode of payment for the margin amount.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Margin Handling is selected as Refund
to the Supplier or Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier.
Interest Refund Handling Select how the interest refund should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to IBP
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Interest Bearing Party
• Settle with Outstanding Finances
Interest Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the interest refunds.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Interest Refund Handling is selected
as Refund to the Interest Bearing Party or Auto-Settle and
Refund to IBP.

2-27
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-12 (Cont.) Finance Parameters - Field Description

Field Name Description

Excess Handling Select how excess payment made towards settling of outstanding
invoice/finance, should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Reconcile
• Auto-Reconcile and Refund
• Manually-Reconcile
• Refund to beneficiary or payment party
Excess Refund Party Select the party to refund the excess amount to.
The available options are:
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
• Payment Party
Excess Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the excess payment refund.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Multiple Disbursement Select Yes to enable multiple finance disbursements for an invoice.
Allowed Else select No.
Holiday Treatment for Select the day to consider if the finance disbursement falls on a
Future Funding holiday.
The available options are:
• Next Business Day
• Previous Business Day
Min Assignment (%) Specify the minimum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this program.
Max Assignment (%) Specify the maximum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this program.
Credit Cover (%) Specify the credit cover percentage allowed for the transaction under
this program.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Credit Cover Start Date Specify the credit cover start date for the transaction under this
program.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Credit Cover End Date Specify the credit cover end date for the transaction under this
program.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Allow Back-Dated Select Yes to enable back-dated disbursements for the transaction
Disbursements under this program. Else select No.

Note:
† Pre-Shipment settlement gets initiated only if the Auto Settlement Applicable
is enabled.

2-28
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Note:
The application supports defining a specific assignment amount during a
transaction. Similarly, a specific credit cover percentage can be defined against
exposure on the import factor or buyer.

6. Click Link Spokes tab.

The Create Program Parameters - Link Spokes screen displays.

Figure 2-15 Create Program Parameters - Link Spokes

7. On Link Spokes tab, specify the fields to link multiple spokes/counterparties to the anchor
and configure the finance parameters.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-29
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-13 Link Spokes - Field Description

Field Name Description

Spoke Click the search icon to select a spoke for the program. A Spoke can
be a customer or a non-customer.
Interest Bearing Party Select the party that bears the interest.
The available options are:
• Anchor
• Spoke
Import Factor Click the search icon to select the import factor to be linked to the
spoke.
This field is displayed only if Two Factor Applicable is enabled in
the Basic Information tab.
Insurance Company Click the search icon to select the insurance company to be linked to
the spoke.
This field is displayed only if Insurance Applicable is enabled in the
Basic Information tab.
Auto-Initiate Finance Select Yes to enable auto financing for this spoke. Else select No.
Preferred Disbursement Select the preferred mode of disbursement for this spoke.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is mandatory if Auto-Initiate Finance is enabled.
Auto Settlement Select Yes to enable automated settlement (repayment) for this
Applicable † spoke. Else select No.
Preferred Settlement Mode Select the preferred mode of settlement for this spoke.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Min. Finance (%) Specify the minimum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this spoke.
Max. Finance (%) Specify the maximum finance percentage allowed for financing a
transaction of this spoke.
Min. Tenor (Days) Specify the minimum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
spoke.
Max. Tenor (Days) Specify the maximum tenor allowed for financing a transaction of this
spoke.
Grace Days Specify the number of grace days.
This is the period post the finance due date, within which the finance
can be settled without penalty.
Stale Period (Days) Specify the number of stale days.
This is the period post the invoice date, after which the invoice
becomes stale and will not be financed automatically any more for
this program.
With Recourse Select Yes to specify that the finance is allowed with recourse, else
select No.
Disbursement Currency Select the currency in which the finance should be disbursed for this
spoke.
This field is mandatory when Auto-Initiate Finance is enabled.

2-30
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-13 (Cont.) Link Spokes - Field Description

Field Name Description

Auto Debit Applicable Select Yes to enable auto debit to recover the outstanding finance
due from the borrower for this spoke. Else select No.
Liquidation Order for Auto Specify the default auto-debit liquidation order to be applied in case
Debit partial funds are debited from the payment party on auto-debit.
The available options are:
• E - Penalty on Interest Outstanding
• O - Penalty on Principal Outstanding
• I – Monthly Interest Due
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent finances)
• F - Finance Due or Overdue (Outstanding Finances)
This field is mandatory if Auto Debit Applicable is enabled.
Disbursement Auth Select Yes to enable authorization for the disbursement transactions
Required for this spoke. Else select No.
Disbursement Auto Select Yes to enable automatic processing of disbursement
Processing transactions for this spoke. Else select No.
Amendment Auth Select Yes to enable authorization for the amendment transactions
Required for this spoke. Else select No.
This field appears only if the Product selected has Amendment
Applicable enabled.
Amendment Auto Select Yes to enable automatic processing of amendment
Processing transactions for this spoke. Else select No.
This field appears only if the Product selected has Amendment
Applicable enabled.
Settlement Auth Required Select Yes to enable authorization for the settlement transactions for
this spoke. Else select No.
Settlement Auto Select Yes enable automatic processing of settlement transactions
Processing for this spoke. Else select No.
Margin Handling Select how the margin should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Supplier
• Settle with Outstanding Finances
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Product Category selected as Invoice.
Margin Payment Mode Select the mode of payment for the margin amount.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Margin Handling is selected as Refund
to the Supplier or Auto-Settle and Refund to Supplier.
Interest Refund Handling Select how the interest refund should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Settle and Refund to IBP
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Interest Bearing Party
• Settle with Outstanding Finances

2-31
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-13 (Cont.) Link Spokes - Field Description

Field Name Description

Interest Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the interest refunds.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
This field is displayed only if Interest Refund Handling is selected
as Refund to the Interest Bearing Party or Auto-Settle and
Refund to IBP.
Excess Handling Select how excess payment made towards settling of outstanding
invoice/finance, should be handled.
The available options are:
• Auto-Reconcile
• Auto-Reconcile and Refund
• Manually-Reconcile
• Refund to beneficiary or payment party
Excess Refund Party Select the party to refund the excess amount to.
The available options are:
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
• Payment Party
Excess Refund Payment Select the mode of payment for the excess payment refund.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Multiple Disbursement Select Yes to enable multiple finance disbursements for an invoice.
Allowed Else select No.
Min Assignment (%) Specify the minimum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this spoke.
Max Assignment (%) Specify the maximum percentage of the assignment amount allowed
for financing a transaction of this spoke.
Credit Cover (%) Specify the credit cover percentage allowed for the transaction for
this spoke.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Credit Cover Start Date Specify the credit cover start date for the transaction for this spoke.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Credit Cover End Date Specify the credit cover end date for the transaction for this spoke.
This field is displayed only if the Product selected in this program
has Limit Type selected as Assignment .
Liquidate Pre-Shipment Switch the toggle ON to enable linking of Pre-Shipment and Post-
Finances † † Shipment programs.
Pre-Shipment Program Displays the applicable pre-shipment programs auto populated for
the selected supplier-buyer combination.
This field is enabled only if Liquidate Pre-Shipment Finances is
enabled.

2-32
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

Table 2-13 (Cont.) Link Spokes - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pre-Shipment Finances Select the liquidation preference for the settlement of pre-shipment
Liquidation Preference † finance.
The available options are:
• Invoice Linked with PO
• FIFO
• Invoice Linked with PO and FIFO
This field is enabled only if Liquidate Pre-Shipment Finances is
enabled.
Allow Back-Dated Select Yes to enable back-dated disbursements for the transaction of
Disbursements this spoke. Else select No.

Note:
† Pre-Shipment settlement gets initiated only if Auto Settlement Applicable is
enabled.

Note:
†† For existing implementations of SCF, Liquidate Pre-Shipment Finances and
Pre-Shipment Finances Liquidation Preference will be captured in Program
Parameters basis their value in System parameters. System Parameters will be
defaulted to ‘No’ but can be changed to ‘Yes’ at the discretion of the bank or
Financial Institution during upgrade to current release version. In such cases the
application will establish Pre-Post shipment finance linkage if a valid pre-
shipment linkage is found

8. Click External Code link to specify the external spoke codes.

The External Code pop-up screen displays.

Figure 2-16 Link Spokes - External Code

2-33
 Chapter 2
Program Parameters Maintenance

a. In the Spoke External Code field, click the search icon to select the external spoke
code. The corresponding Spoke Division Code and Anchor Division Code gets
displayed in the adjacent columns.
b. Click Add/Edit to add the details in the grid.
c. Repeat these steps to add more external codes.
d. If required, click Options icon under the Action column in the grid and then click
Delete to remove the record.
e. Click Save external Code to save the external code details.
9. Click Add/Edit to add the record to the grid.
10. Click Reset to clear the selected values, if required.

11. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid.

• Click Options icon in the Action column to edit or delete the row.
12. In the Document Upload section, click Add to upload the documents.

• Click the Document Status drop-down to filter the documents based on status.
13. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization (if applicable).

2.3.2 View Program Parameters

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize program
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Program Parameters. Under Program Parameters, click View
Program Parameters.
The View Program Parameters screen displays.

Figure 2-17 View Program Parameters

2-34
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Program Code,
Program Name, Product Code, Anchor Id, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.4 Accounting Maintenance

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting such as
account mapping, entry codes, roles, and accounting entries in Supply Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Accounting Role
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting roles in
Supply Chain Finance system.
• Entry Codes
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for entry codes in Supply
Chain Finance system.
• Accounting Entries
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting entries in
Supply Chain Finance system.
• External Account Mapping
This topic describes the information to create external account mapping. i.e., mapping of a
customer external account to a specific product, event, etc.
• Internal Account Mapping
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for internal account
mapping in Supply Chain Finance system.

2-35
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

2.4.1 Accounting Role

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting roles in Supply
Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Account Role
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create role codes for the purpose of
accounting.
• View Account Role
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize
accounting role records that have been created.

2.4.1.1 Create Account Role

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create role codes for the purpose of
accounting.
This is required to identify the Dr or Cr leg in an accounting entry. Dr or Cr legs with other
parameters like amount type, are created through Entry Codes submenu.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Role.
3. Under Role, click Create Account Role.
The Create Account Role screen displays.

Figure 2-18 Create Account Role

4. Specify the fields on Create Account Role screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-36
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Table 2-14 Create Account Role - Field Description

Field Description
Accounting Role Code Specify a unique code for the accounting role being created.
Accounting Role Specify a description to associate with the role.
Description
5. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.4.1.2 View Account Role

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize accounting
role records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Role. Under Role, click
View Account Role.
The View Account Role screen displays.

Figure 2-19 View Account Role

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Accounting Role
Code, Accounting Role Description, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.

2-37
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires

necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.4.2 Entry Codes

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for entry codes in Supply
Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Account Entry Code
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create entry codes, or Dr and Cr legs for
an accounting entry.
• View Account Entry Code
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize
accounting entry code records that have been created.

2.4.2.1 Create Account Entry Code

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create entry codes, or Dr and Cr legs for an
accounting entry.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Entry Codes.
3. Under Entry Codes, click Create Account Entry Code.
The Create Account Entry Code screen displays.

2-38
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Figure 2-20 Create Account Entry Code

4. Specify the fields on Create Account Entry Code screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-15 Create Account Entry Code - Field Description

Field Description
Accounting Entry Code Specify a unique identification code for the accounting entry.
Accounting Entry Specify a description for the accounting entry.
Description
Role Details This section displays the following fields to specify the role
details for creating an account entry code.
Debit Role Select the role of the debit party.
Debit Party Select the party type to debit.
Debit Amount Type Select the amount type to debit.
Debit Settlement Method Select the method to be used for debit settlement.
Credit Role Select the role of the credit party.
Credit Party Select the party to credit.
Credit Amount Type Select the amount type to credit.
Credit Settlement Method Select the method to be used for credit settlement.

5. Click Add/Edit to add the details to the grid.

• Click Options icon in the Action column to edit or delete the row.
6. Click Reset to clear the selected values, if required.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2-39
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

2.4.2.2 View Account Entry Code

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize accounting
entry code records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Entry Codes. Under
Entry Codes, click View Account Entry Code.
The View Account Entry Code screen displays.

Figure 2-21 View Account Entry Code

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Accounting
Entry Code, Accounting Entry Description, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.

2-40
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.

• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.4.3 Accounting Entries

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Accounting entries in
Supply Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Accounting Entries
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create accounting entries by mapping
entry codes with appropriate product, event, payment mode, and so on.
• View Account Entries
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize
accounting entry records that have been created.

2.4.3.1 Create Accounting Entries

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create accounting entries by mapping entry
codes with appropriate product, event, payment mode, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Accounting Entries.
3. Under Accounting Entries, click Create Account Entries.
The Create Account Entries screen displays.

Figure 2-22 Create Account Entries

4. Specify the fields on Create Account Entries screen.

2-41
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-16 Create Account Entries - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the branch to add accounting entries for. Values in this field
are listed based on your access rights.
Product Select the product to add accounting entries for. User can select ALL
to create the entry code for all the products.
Event Select the event to add accounting entries for.
The available options are:
• Amendment
• Auto Debit
• Disbursement
• Disbursement Reversal
• Excess Refund
• Interest Refund
• Margin Refund
• Residual Payment Refund
• Settlement
• Settlement Reversal
Filter Criteria Select the filter criteria for specific application of accounting entries.
Based on the selected filter criteria, select the type/mode from the
respective field(s) that appear. For more information, refer to Filter
Criteria for Events.
Is NPA Switch this toggle ON if the accounting entry is for an NPA.
Payment Mode Select the mode of the payment.
The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Interest Refund Payment Select the mode of the payment for interest refund.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Interest Type Select the type of interest collection.
The available options are:
• Front Ended
• Rear Ended
Interest Refund Handling Select how the interest refund should be handled.
Mechanism The available options are:
• Manually Settle O/s Finances
• Refund to the Interest Bearing Party
• Settle with Outstanding Finances

2-42
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Table 2-16 (Cont.) Create Account Entries - Field Description

Field Description
Pre-Post Conversion Switch this toggle ON if the accounting entry is for a pre-post
conversion.
Charge Type Select the charge type as Credit or Debit.
Payment Party Select the payment party if the accounting entry set up is separate
for a specific payment party.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
Account Type Select the type of account to be mapped.
The available options are:
• OD A/C
• CASA
Accounting Entries This section displays the following fields to select the
accounting entry code and map it to an accounting entry.
Accounting Entry Code Click the search icon to select the required accounting entry code.
Accounting Entry Displays the description of the selected entry code.
Description
Sequence Select the sequence to be set for the accounting entry code.

Table 2-17 Filter Criteria for Events - Field Description

Event Filter Criteria Additional Filter Options

Amendment Interest Collection Type • Interest Type
Charge Type Based • Charge Type
Disbursement Payment Mode, Interest Collection Type and Pre- • Payment Mode
Post conversion • Interest Type
• Pre-Post Conversion
Charge Type Based • Charge Type
Settlement Based on Interest Refund Payment Mode • Is NPA
• Payment Mode
• Interest Refund
Payment Mode
• Interest Type
• Interest Refund
Handling Mechanism
• Pre-Post Conversion
Based on Interest Refund Handling Mechanism • Is NPA
• Payment Mode
• Interest Type
• Interest Refund
Handling Mechanism
• Pre-Post Conversion
Based on Interest Collection Type • Is NPA
• Payment Mode
• Interest Type
• Pre-Post Conversion
Based on Charges • Charge Type
Auto-Debit Default • NA

2-43
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Table 2-17 (Cont.) Filter Criteria for Events - Field Description

Event Filter Criteria Additional Filter Options

Payment Party, Account Type and Payment • Payment Party
Mode Based • Account Type
• Payment Mode
Interest Refund Payment Mode Based • Payment Mode
Margin Refund Payment Mode Based • Payment Mode
Excess Refund Payment Mode Based • Payment Mode
Residual Payment Mode Based • Payment Mode
Payment Refund
5. Click Add/Edit to add the details to the grid.
6. Click the hyperlink to view the details of the selected Accounting Entry Code.
The Accounting Entry Code Details screen displays.

Figure 2-23 Accounting Entry Code Details

7. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid.

• Click Options icon in the Action column to edit or delete the row.
8. Click Reset to clear the selected values, if required.
9. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization (if applicable).

2.4.3.2 View Account Entries

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize accounting
entry records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

2-44
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Accounting Entries.
Under Accounting Entries, click View Account Entries.
The View Account Entries screen displays.

Figure 2-24 View Account Entries

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Product, Event,
Payment Mode, Interest Type, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.4.4 External Account Mapping

This topic describes the information to create external account mapping. i.e., mapping of a
customer external account to a specific product, event, etc.

2-45
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

This topic contains the following subtopics:

• Create External Account Mapping
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create external account mapping. i.e.
mapping of a customer external account to a specific product, event, etc.
• View External Account Mapping
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize external
account mapping records that have been created.

2.4.4.1 Create External Account Mapping

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create external account mapping. i.e.
mapping of a customer external account to a specific product, event, etc.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click External Account
Mapping.
3. Under External Account Mapping, click Create External Account Mapping.
The Create External Account Mapping screen displays.

Figure 2-25 Create External Account Mapping

4. Specify the fields on Create External Account Mapping screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-46
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Table 2-18 Create External Account Mapping - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the branch to be mapped to customer’s external account.
Product Select the product to be mapped with the account.
The user can select ALL if the account is to be used for all the
products.
Event Select the account event from the list.
Currency Select the currency of the external account.
Party Id Click on the Search icon to select the party for whom account
mapping needs to be done.
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria for specific application of
accounting entries.
The available options are:
• Default
• Program Based
• Division Code Based
Default Account Switch this toggle to specify if this account should be considered as
the default one.
Payment Mode Select the mode of payment for the account.
Account Specify the account number.
IFSC Code Specify the IFSC code of the bank’s branch of the entered account
number.
Bank Name Specify the name of the bank.
Branch Name Specify the name of the bank’s branch associated with the entered
IFSC code.

5. Click Save to save the data and send it for authorization.

2.4.4.2 View External Account Mapping

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize external
account mapping records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click External Account
Mapping. Under External Account Mapping, click View External Account Mapping.
The View External Account Mapping screen displays.

2-47
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Figure 2-26 View External Account Mapping

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Product, Event,
Party Id, Program, Division Code, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.4.5 Internal Account Mapping

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for internal account mapping in
Supply Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Internal Account Mapping
This topic describes the systematic instruction to map internal accounts (Customer
accounts and Bank GL accounts) with specific accounting roles.
• View Internal Account Mapping
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize internal
account mapping records that have been created.

2-48
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

2.4.5.1 Create Internal Account Mapping

This topic describes the systematic instruction to map internal accounts (Customer accounts
and Bank GL accounts) with specific accounting roles.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Internal Account
Mapping.
3. Under Internal Account Mapping, click Create Internal Account Mapping.
The Create Internal Account Mapping screen displays.

Figure 2-27 Create Internal Account Mapping

4. Specify the fields on Create Internal Account Mapping screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-19 Create Internal Account Mapping - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the branch in which account is maintained.
Product Select the product for which internal account mapping is to be
maintained.
The user can select ALL if the account is to be used for all the
products.
Role Click the search icon to select the accounting role to map the
account to.

2-49
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

Table 2-19 (Cont.) Create Internal Account Mapping - Field Description

Field Description
Account Type Switch the toggle button to select either CASA or GL for the
mapping.
Settlement Method Select the settlement method corresponding to the account type.
Account in Transaction Switch this toggle ON specify whether the accounting should be
Currency done in transaction currency or not.
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria for specific application of
accounting entries.
The available options are:
• Event, Program, and Party Based
• Program and Party Based
• Party and Division Code Based
• Event and Party Based
• Program Based
• Party Based
• Event Based
• Charge Code Based
• Default
Program Click the search icon and select the program to map the account
with.
This field is displayed only if Filter Criteria selected as Program.
Party Click the search icon and select the party to whose account is to be
mapped.
This field is displayed only if Filter Criteria selected as Party.
Division Code Click the search icon and select the applicable division code.
This field is displayed only if Filter Criteria selected as Division
Code.
Event Select an event for account mapping.
This field is displayed only if Filter Criteria selected as Event.
Charge Code Select the charge code to map the account with.
This field is displayed only if Filter Criteria selected as Charge
Code.
Account Currency Select the currency of the account to be mapped.
Account Number Click the Search icon and select real/virtual account number.
Default Account Switch this toggle ON to specify if this account should be considered
as the default one.

5. Click Add/ Edit to add the details to the grid.

• Click Options icon in the Action column to edit or delete the row.
6. Click Reset to clear the selected values, if required.
7. Click Save to save the data and send it for authorization.

2.4.5.2 View Internal Account Mapping

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize internal
account mapping records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:

2-50
 Chapter 2
Accounting Maintenance

• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected

• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Accounting. Under Accounting, click Internal Account
Mapping. Under Internal Account Mapping, click View Internal Account Mapping.
The View Internal Account Mapping screen displays.

Figure 2-28 View Internal Account Mapping

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Branch,
Product, Role, Party, Event, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.

2-51
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.5 Alerts Maintenance

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for Alerts such as contact
details, definition, and decisioning in Supply Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Alert Contact Details
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data to maintain the contact
details of the party for alert codes.
• Alert Definition
This topic describes the information to maintain the alert definitions in Supply Chain
Finance system.
• Alert Decisioning
This topic describes the information to set and manage the alerts in Supply Chain Finance
system.

2.5.1 Alert Contact Details

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data to maintain the contact details
of the party for alert codes.
The user can maintain contact details for multiple alerts for a selected party.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Alert Contact Details
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create a record of party contact details for
alerts.
• View Alert Contact Details
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert
contact detail records that have been created.

2.5.1.1 Create Alert Contact Details

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create a record of party contact details for
alerts.
A newly created contact details record takes effect once authorized and cannot be modified
thereafter.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Contact Details.
3. Under Alert Contact Details, click Create Alert Contact Details.
The Create Alert Contact Details screen displays.

2-52
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Figure 2-29 Create Alert Contact Details

4. Specify the fields on Create Alert Contact Details screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-20 Create Alert Contact Details - Field Description

Field Description
Party Click the Search icon and select the party to add the alert contact
details for.
Alert Code Click the Search icon and select the alert code to enter the contact
details for.
Telephone Number Specify the telephone number to be considered for selected alert.
Email Specify the email ID to be considered for the alert.

5. Click Add icon to add a row for a contact.

6. Perform any of the below action on the grid record(s).
• Click Edit icon to edit the contact details.
• Click Save icon to save the contact details.
• Click Delete icon to remove the row.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.5.1.2 View Alert Contact Details

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert contact
detail records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected

2-53
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Contact Details. Under Alert
Contact Details, click View Alert Contact Details.
The View Alert Contact Details screen displays.

Figure 2-30 View Alert Contact Details

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Party Id, Record
Status, and Authorization Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2-54
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

2.5.2 Alert Definition

This topic describes the information to maintain the alert definitions in Supply Chain Finance
system.
The Alert Definition functionality can be used to configure and manage the types of alerts.
User can define alert categories for various events. These defined alerts can be further used in
the Alert Decisioning screen to set alerts.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Alert Definition
This topic describes the systematic instruction to configure and manage various types of
alerts.
• View Alert Definition
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert
definition records that have been created.

2.5.2.1 Create Alert Definition

This topic describes the systematic instruction to configure and manage various types of alerts.
Newly created alert types take effect once authorized and cannot be modified thereafter.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Definition.
3. Under Alert Definition, click Create Alert Definition.
The Create Alert Definition screen displays.

Figure 2-31 Create Alert Definition

4. Specify the fields on Create Alert Definition screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-55
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Table 2-21 Create Alert Definition - Field Description

Field Description
Alert Code Specify the unique alert code to be maintained in the system.
Alert Description Specify the description of the alert.
Alert Category Select the category of the alert.
The available options are:
• Limits
• Finance
Limit Party Type Select the limit party to set the alert for.
Is Root Entity Switch this toggle ON to specify if the selected limit party is the main
entity.
Event Select the event for which the alert should be used.
Effective Date Click the calendar icon and select the date from when the alert is
effective in the system.
Expiry Date Click the calendar icon and select the date up to when the alert can
be used in the system.

5. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.5.2.2 View Alert Definition

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert
definition records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Definition. Under Alert
Definition, click View Alert Definition.
The View Alert Definition screen displays.

Figure 2-32 View Alert Definition

2-56
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Alert Code, Alert
Description, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.5.3 Alert Decisioning

This topic describes the information to set and manage the alerts in Supply Chain Finance
system.
The Alert Decisioning functionality is used to choose from the defined alerts and set the same
for a recipient. The delivery mode and frequency for sending the alerts can also be defined.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Alert Decisioning
This topic describes the systematic instruction to set the delivery mode and frequency of
sending alerts to a recipient.
• View Alert Decisioning
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert
decisioning records that have been created.

2.5.3.1 Create Alert Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to set the delivery mode and frequency of
sending alerts to a recipient.
Newly set decisioning records take effect once authorized. The phone number and email ID
are obtained from the records maintained in the Alert Contact Details screen. Additional
contact information can be entered in this screen.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

2-57
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Decisioning.
3. Under Alert Decisioning, click Create Alert Decisioning.
The Create Alert Decisioning screen displays.

Figure 2-33 Create Alert Decisioning

4. Specify the fields on Create Alert Decisioning screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-22 Create Alert Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Filter Criteria This section displays the following fields to select the category
and filter criteria for creating an alert decision.
Alert Category Select the category of the event for which the alert needs to be set.
The available options are:
• Limits
• Finance
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria for specific application of alerts.
The options are:
• Limit Party
• Program Based
• Default
• Product Based

2-58
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Table 2-22 (Cont.) Create Alert Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Party Click the search icon and select the limit party to set the alerts for.

This field appears if the Filter Criteria is selected as Limit

Party.

Program Click the search icon and select the program to set the alerts for.

This field appears if the Filter Criteria is selected as Program

Based.

Product Click the search icon and select the product to set the alerts for.

This field appears if the Filter Criteria is selected as Product

Based.

Alert Decision Details This section displays the following fields to define the alert
decision details for the selected filter criteria.
Event Select the event to set the alert for.
Alert Code Click the search icon and select the required alert code. The list of
alert codes are displayed as per selected combination of alert
category and event.
Description Displays the description of the selected alert code.
Recipient Select the recipient to whom the alert should be sent.
Frequency Select the frequency to send the alerts as follows:
• Online - if the alert should be sent only when the event is
generated.
• Scheduled - if the alert should be sent one or more times prior
to the generation of the event.
Delivery Mode Select the mode through which the alert should be sent.
Additional Phone Specify the additional phone number to send the alert on.

This field is displayed only for the WhatsApp, and SMS

modes of delivery.

Additional Email Specify the additional email address to send the alert on.

This field is displayed only for the Email delivery mode.

Text Template for Email Click the search icon and select the text template for an email alert.

This field is displayed only for Online frequency and Email

delivery mode.

Attachment Template for Click the search icon and select the attachment template for an email
Email alert.

This field is displayed only for Online frequency and Email

delivery mode.

Text Template for Click the search icon and select the text template for the WhatsApp
WhatsApp alert.

This field is displayed only for Online frequency and

WhatsApp delivery mode.

2-59
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Table 2-22 (Cont.) Create Alert Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Text Template for SMS Click the search icon and select the text template for an SMS alert.

This field is displayed only for Online frequency and SMS

delivery mode.

Text Template for Specify the text template for the Dashboard alert.
Dashboard
This field is displayed only for Online frequency and
Dashboard delivery mode.

5. On selecting the Scheduled option in the Frequency field, click the Alert Calendar icon to
select the alert schedule.
The Alert Schedule - Alert before Event popup screen displays.

Figure 2-34 Alert Schedule - Alert before Event

6. Specify the fields on Alert before Event tab.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-23 Alert before Event - Field Description

Field Description
Generate days before Specify the number of days prior the event the alert to be sent.
Number of Alerts Specify the total alerts to be sent.
Interval Days Specify the interval in days between each alert.

7. In Alert Schedule pop-up screen, select the Alert on Event tab.

The Alert Schedule - Alert on Event popup screen displays.

2-60
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Figure 2-35 Alert Schedule - Alert on Event

8. Specify the fields on the Alert on Event tab.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-24 Alert on Event - Field Description

Field Description
Text Template Specify the text for the alert.
Attachment Template Click the search icon to select the attachment template for the email
alert.
This field is displayed only if the Delivery Mode is selected as Email.

9. In Alert Schedule popup screen, select the Alert after Event tab.
The Alert Schedule - Alert after Event popup screen displays.

2-61
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

Figure 2-36 Alert Schedule - Alert after Event

10. Specify the fields on the Alert after Event tab.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-25 Alert after Event - Field Description

Field Description
Generate days before Specify the number of days after the event the alert to be sent.
Number of Alerts Specify the total alerts to be sent.
Interval Days Specify the interval in days between each alert.

11. Click Add/Edit to add alert decision details in the grid or modify a selected records from
the grid.
12. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid.

a. Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Action column.
b. Click Edit to modify records in the grid.
c. Click Delete to remove the record.
13. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.5.3.2 View Alert Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize alert
decisioning records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed

2-62
 Chapter 2
Alerts Maintenance

• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Alerts. Under Alerts, click Alert Decisioning. Under Alert
Decisioning, click View Alert Decisioning.
The View Alert Decisioning screen displays.

Figure 2-37 View Alert Decisioning

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Party, Program,
Product, Authorization Status, Record Status, and Category.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2-63
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

2.6 Charges Maintenance

This topic describes the information to maintain the charges in Supply Chain system.
Banks are empowered to configure flexible and preferential pricing as per corporate profile and
assessment. The levying of the charges can be triggered by specific events such as auto-debit,
EOD, etc. Once configured, the charges would get levied for manual as well as auto
processing mode for transactions.
Charge pricing is determined by configuring various pricing methods such as fixed amount,
fixed percentage, slab based pricing, tier based pricing and so on. The frequency of calculation
and collection, such as, daily/weekly/monthly/yearly, can also be defined for a charge. Both
standard and discount type of charge is supported.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Charge Code
This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for charge codes in Supply
Chain Finance system.
• Charge Rule Maintenance
This topic describes the information to setup the rules for charge pricing/charge calculation
based on the bank’s requirements. Charge rule enables user to create a template for
pricing method and link the same to a product/program or corporate through other
submenus like charge decisioning and preferential charge pricing
• Charge Decisioning
This topic describes the information to map the charge rule template and charge code to a
specific products, program, event etc. The party, calculation, and collection frequencies for
the charge can be defined as well.
• Charge Preferential Pricing
This topic describes the information to configure the special pricing or charge application
for a specific corporate.

2.6.1 Charge Code

This topic describes the information to setup the reference data for charge codes in Supply
Chain Finance system.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Charge Code
This topic describes the systematic instruction to manage the charge code for a specific
charge group, charge type, and charge category.
• View Charge Code
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize charge
code records that have been created.

2.6.1.1 Create Charge Code

This topic describes the systematic instruction to manage the charge code for a specific charge
group, charge type, and charge category.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

2-64
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Code.
3. Under Charge Code, click Create Charge Code.
The Create Charge Code screen displays.

Figure 2-38 Create Charge Code

4. Specify the fields on Create Charge Code screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-26 Create Charge Code - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Code Specify the unique charge code to be created.
Charge Description Specify the description of the charge.
Charge Group Select the group to which this charge code belongs. This field is
purely for the purpose of maintaining information in the Management
Information System (MIS).
The available options are:
• Rebates
• Tax
• Commission
• Fee
Charge Category Select the value to specify whether charge is of Tax or Standard
category.
Charge Type Specify if this charge code is of Debit or Credit type.
Effective Date Click the calendar icon to select the start date of the charge code
validity.
Expiry Date Click the calendar icon to select the end date of the charge code
validity.

5. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2-65
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

2.6.1.2 View Charge Code

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize charge code
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Code. Under Charge
Code, click View Charge Code.
The View Charge Code screen displays.

Figure 2-39 View Charge Code

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Charge Code,
Charge Description, Charge Group, Charge Category, Authorization Status, and
Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.

2-66
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.6.2 Charge Rule Maintenance

This topic describes the information to setup the rules for charge pricing/charge calculation
based on the bank’s requirements. Charge rule enables user to create a template for pricing
method and link the same to a product/program or corporate through other submenus like
charge decisioning and preferential charge pricing
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Charge Rule Maintenance
This topic describes the systematic instruction to define rules for charge pricing/charge
calculation based on the bank’s requirements.
• View Charge Rule
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize program
records that have been created.

2.6.2.1 Create Charge Rule Maintenance

This topic describes the systematic instruction to define rules for charge pricing/charge
calculation based on the bank’s requirements.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Rule Maintenance.
3. Under Charge Rule Maintenance, click Create Rule Maintenance.
The Create Rule Maintenance screen displays.

2-67
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-40 Create Rule Maintenance

4. Specify the fields on Create Rule Maintenance screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-27 Create Rule Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Pricing Specify the pricing description of charge.
Description
Annum Basis Select the number of days to be considered in a year for tenor-based
calculations.
Pricing Category Select the pricing category. Based on the selected category, pricing
methods will be loaded.
Pricing Method Select the method to configure the charge pricing.
Pricing Currency Select the currency in which pricing is to be done.
Charge in Txn Currency Switch the toggle ON if the charge should be levied in transaction
currency otherwise charge will get levied in pricing currency.
Min/Max Validation Criteria Specify whether the charges should be applied based on the range
of amount or percentage.
Min. Charge Amount/ Specify the minimum charge amount/ percentage to be considered.
Percent This field is displayed based on the value selected in the Min/Max
Validation Criteria field.
Max. Charge Amount/ Specify the maximum charge amount/ percentage to be considered.
Percent This field is displayed based on the value selected in the Min/Max
Validation Criteria field.
Fixed Amount Specify the charge amount.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Fixed
Amount.
Flat Charge Switch the toggle ON if flat charge should be applied.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Fixed
Percent.

2-68
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-27 (Cont.) Create Rule Maintenance - Field Description

Field Description
Fixed Percent Specify the charge percentage.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Fixed
Percent.
From Displays the start value of the amount/ percent/ duration range.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Tier
Based Categories.
To Specify the end value of the amount/ percent/ duration range.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Tier
Based Categories.
Amount Specify the charge amount.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Tier
Based Amount or Tier Based Mixed.
Units Specify the number of charge unit.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Tier
Based Amount and Pricing Method is selected as count-based.
Percent Specify the charge percentage.
This field is displayed only if Pricing Category is selected as Tier
Based Percent or Tier Based Mixed.

5. Click Add to add the charge rule details to the grid.

a. Select the record in the grid and then click Options icon in the Action column.
b. Click Edit to edit the selected row.
c. Click Delete to delete the selected row.
6. Click Reset to reset the fields, if required.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.6.2.2 View Charge Rule

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize program
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Rule. Under Charge
Rule, click View Charge Rule.
The View Charge Rule screen displays.

2-69
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-41 View Charge Rule

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Charge Pricing
Id, Charge Description, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.6.3 Charge Decisioning

This topic describes the information to map the charge rule template and charge code to a
specific products, program, event etc. The party, calculation, and collection frequencies for the
charge can be defined as well.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Charge Decisioning
This topic describes the systematic instruction to map the charge rule template and charge
code to a specific products, program, event etc.

2-70
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

• View Charge Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize charge
decisioning records that have been created.

2.6.3.1 Create Charge Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to map the charge rule template and charge
code to a specific products, program, event etc.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Decisioning.
3. Under Charge Decisioning, click Create Charge Decisioning.
The Create Charge Decisioning screen displays.

Figure 2-42 Create Charge Decisioning

4. Specify the fields on Create Charge Decisioning screen.

2-71
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-28 Create Charge Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Event Select the event on the occurrence of which, the charge should be
applied.
The available options are:
• Amendment
• Disbursement
• Disbursement Reversal
• Settlement
• Settlement Reversal
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria on which the charge is required to
be calculated and debited.
The available options are:
• Program Instrument Type Status Based
• Instrument Type Status Based
• Program Based
• Product Based
• Default
Program Click the search icon to select the program for which the charge is to
be mapped.
This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as Program
Based.
Instrument Type Select the instrument type for which the charge is to be mapped.
The available options are:
• PO
• Invoice
• Cheque
• Debit Note
This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as
Instrument Type.
Instrument Status Select the relevant status of the instrument based on which the
charge would get levied. Different charges and pricing can be
configured for combination of instruments and their status.
This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as
Instrument Type.
Product Select the product for which the charge is to be mapped.
This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as Product
Based.
Inherit Charges Specify if default charges should be inherited as set up for default
filter criteria or should be overridden as well.
The available options are:
• Inherit Default Charges
• Inherit Default Charges and Override

2-72
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-28 (Cont.) Create Charge Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Code Click the search icon to select the charge code for which the
decisioning is to be configured.
Charge Sharing Switch the toggle ON if charge sharing is applicable.
Sharing Percentage Click the link to specify the sharing percentage for each party. Refer
Allocation Sharing Percentage Allocation.
This link is displayed only if the Charge Sharing toggle is enabled.
Party To Charge Select the party to be charged.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Export Factor
• Import Factor
• Insurance Party
• Supplier
This field appears only if the Charge Sharing toggle is disabled.
Charge Pricing Rule Click the search icon to select the charge pricing rule to be applied.
External Pricing Switch the toggle ON to allow the user to configure the external
pricing.
By default, this toggle will be OFF.
Charge Criteria Select the criteria to be considered based on which the charge
should be calculated.
The available options are:
• Finance Amount
• Invoice Amount
• Parent Charge Code
External Pricing System Select the external pricing system from the drop-down list for which
the external charges needs to be configured.
This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
External Pricing Identifier Specify the unique identifier for the external pricing system.
This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
External Pricing Identifier Specify the brief description about the external pricing identifier.
Description This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
Reference Tenor Start Specify which date should be considered to calculate the start of
Date charge tenor duration.
The available options are:
• Business Date
• Finance Maturity Date
Reference Tenor End Date Specify which date should be considered to calculate the end of
charge tenor duration.
The available options are:
• Business Date
• Finance Maturity Date
Effective Date Click the calendar icon to select the start date of the charge
decisioning validity.
Expiry Date Click the calendar icon to select the end date of the charge
decisioning validity.
Auto Waive Switch the toggle ON to enable automatic charge waiving at the time
of transaction processing.

2-73
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-28 (Cont.) Create Charge Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Allow Waiver Switch the toggle ON to enable manual charge waiving at the time of
transaction processing. If the Auto Waive toggle is switched ON,
then this toggle is switched OFF and disabled by default.
Allow Pricing Modification Switch the toggle ON to allow pricing rule modification at the time of
transaction processing. If the Auto Waive toggle is switched ON,
then this toggle is switched OFF and disabled by default.
Allow Override Switch the toggle ON to enable overriding of charge amount at the
time of transaction processing. If the Auto Waive toggle is switched
ON, then this toggle is switched OFF and disabled by default
Collection Parameters Displays the fields related to Collection Parameters under this
section.
Collection Type Select how the charge should be collected.
The available options are:
• Periodic
• Online
Frequency Select the frequency of charge collection.
The available options are:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Half Yearly
This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected as
Periodic.
Reference Period Select when the collection should take place for the selected
frequency.
For monthly or half-yearly frequency, the collection can take place
either at the beginning of the period (BOP) or end of the period
(EOP).
For weekly frequency, the collection can happen on a specific day of
the week.
This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected as
Periodic.
Units Specify whether the charge collection should take place as per units
of specified frequency. If the monthly frequency is specified and the
number of units is 2, then the charge would be collected once in two
months.
This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected as
Periodic.
Calculation Parameters Displays the fields related to Calculation Parameters under this
section.
Calculation Type Select how the charge should be calculated.
The available options are:
• Periodic
• Online

2-74
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-28 (Cont.) Create Charge Decisioning - Field Description

Field Description
Frequency Select the frequency of charge calculation.
The available options are:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Half Yearly
This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.
Reference Period Select when the calculation should take place for the selected
frequency.
For monthly or half-yearly frequency, the calculation can take place
either at the beginning of the period (BOP) or end of the period
(EOP).
For weekly frequency, the calculation can happen on a specific day of
the week.
This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.
Units Specify whether the charge calculation should take place as per units
of specified frequency. If the monthly frequency is specified and the
number of units is 2, then the charge would be calculated once in two
months.
This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.
Add/Override Charges Displays the details of new charges added in this grid.
Default Charges Displays the default charges configured for the selected event in this
grid, if the Inherit Charges is selected as Inherit Default Charges.
These charges cannot be modified.

5. Click Sharing Percentage Allocation link to specify the sharing percentage for each
party.
The Charge Sharing Allocation pop-up screen displays.

2-75
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-43 Charge Sharing Allocation

a. From the Party to Charge list, select the party to be charged.

b. In the Sharing Percentage, specify the percentage to be allotted to the selected party.
c. Click Add to add the details in the grid.
d. Repeat these steps to add more parties to be charged.

Note:
The sum of percentages of all added parties should be 100.

e. If required, click Options icon under the Action column in the grid and then click Edit
to modify details or click Delete to remove the record.
f. Click OK to save the charge sharing details.
6. Click Add to add the details to the grid.
7. Click the hyperlink in the table grid to view the details of the pricing rule.
The Charge Pricing Rule Details screen displays.

2-76
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-44 Charge Pricing Rule Details

8. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid:
a. Select the record in the grid and click Options icon in the Action column.
b. Click Edit to modify the details.
c. Click Delete to remove the record.
9. Click Save to save the data and send it for authorization.

2.6.3.2 View Charge Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize charge
decisioning records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Decisioning. Under
Charge Decisioning, click View Charge Decisioning.
The View Charge Decisioning screen displays.

2-77
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-45 View Charge Decisioning

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Program,
Product, Instrument Type, Instrument Status, Event, Authorization Status, and Record
Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.6.4 Charge Preferential Pricing

This topic describes the information to configure the special pricing or charge application for a
specific corporate.
This topic contains the following subtopics:

2-78
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

• Create Charge Preferential Pricing

This topic describes the systematic instruction to maintain the charges for specific products
or parties.
• View Preferential Pricing
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize
preferential pricing records that have been created.

2.6.4.1 Create Charge Preferential Pricing

This topic describes the systematic instruction to maintain the charges for specific products or
parties.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Preferential Pricing.
3. Under Charge Preferential Pricing, click Create Preferential Pricing.
The Create Preferential Pricing screen displays.

Figure 2-46 Create Preferential Pricing

4. Specify the fields on Create Preferential Pricing screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-79
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-29 Create Preferential Pricing - Field Description

Field Description
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria for specific application of
accounting entries.
Based on the selected criteria, the Program, Party ID, and Customer
Category fields are displayed.
Program Click the search icon to select the program to map the preferential
pricing to.
This field is displayed only if the Filter Criteria is selected as
Program.
Party Click the search icon to select the party to map the preferential
pricing to.
This field is displayed only if the Filter Criteria is selected as Party.
Customer Category Click the search icon to select the customer category.

This field is displayed only if the Filter Criteria is selected as

Customer Category.

Charge Code Click the search icon to select the charge code for pricing
configuration.
Charge Criteria Select the criteria to be considered based on which charge should be
calculated.
The available options are:
• Finance Amount
• Invoice Amount
• Parent Charge Code
Parent Charge Code Select the parent charge code.
This field is displayed if the Charge Criteria is selected as Parent
Charge Code.
Charge Pricing Rule Click the search icon to select the charge pricing rule to be applied.
External Pricing Switch the toggle ON to allow the user to configure the external
pricing.
By default, this toggle will be OFF.
External Pricing System Select the external pricing system from the drop-down list for which
the external charges needs to be configured.
This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
External Pricing Identifier Specify the unique identifier for the external pricing system.
This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
External Pricing Identifier Specify the brief description about the external pricing identifier.
Description This field appears only if the External Pricing toggle is ON.
Reference Tenor Start Specify which date should be considered to calculate the start of
Date tenor duration.
Reference Tenor End Date Specify which date should be considered to calculate the end of
tenor duration.
Effective Date Click the calendar icon to select the start date of the preferential
charge validity.
Expiry Date Click the calendar icon to select the end date of the preferential
charge validity.
Charge Application Switch the toggle ON to enable charge application.

2-80
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-29 (Cont.) Create Preferential Pricing - Field Description

Field Description
Allow Waiver Switch the toggle ON to enable manual charge waiving at the time of
transaction processing.
Allow Override Switch the toggle ON to enable overriding of the charge amount at
the time of transaction processing.
Allow Pricing Modification Switch the toggle ON to allow pricing rule modification at the time of
transaction processing.
Collection Parameters Displays the fields related to Collections Parameters.
Collection Type Select how the pricing should be collected.
The available options are:
• Periodic
• Online
Frequency Select the frequency of charge collection.
The available options are:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Half Yearly

This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected

as Periodic.

Reference Period Select when the collection should take place for the selected
frequency.

For monthly or half-yearly frequency, the collection can take

place either at the beginning of the period (BOP) or end of the
period (EOP).

For weekly frequency, the collection can happen on a specific

day of the week.

This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected

as Periodic.

Units Specify whether the charge collection should take place as per units
of specified frequency.

This field is displayed only if the Collection Type is selected

as Periodic.

Calculation Parameters Displays the fields related to Calculation Parameters.

Calculation Type Select how the pricing should be calculated.
The available options are:
• Periodic
• Online

2-81
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Table 2-29 (Cont.) Create Preferential Pricing - Field Description

Field Description
Frequency Select the frequency of charge calculation.
The available options are:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Half Yearly

This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected

as Periodic.

Reference Period Select when the calculation should take place for the selected
frequency.

For monthly or half-yearly frequency, the calculation can take

place either at the beginning of the period (BOP) or end of the
period (EOP).

For weekly frequency, the calculation can happen on a

specific day of the week.

This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected

as Periodic.

Units Specify whether the charge calculation should take place as per units
of specified frequency.

This field is displayed only if the Calculation Type is selected

as Periodic.

Charges Grid Displays the details of the preferential pricing added as an entry in
this grid.

5. Click Add to add the details to the grid.

6. Click Reset to reset the rows in the grid.
7. Click the hyperlink in the table grid to view the details of the pricing rule.
The Charge Pricing Rule Details screen displays.

2-82
 Chapter 2
Charges Maintenance

Figure 2-47 Charge Pricing Rule Details

8. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid:
a. Select the record in the grid and click Options icon in the Action column.
b. Click Edit to modify the details.
c. Click Delete to remove the record.
9. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.6.4.2 View Preferential Pricing

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize preferential
pricing records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Charges. Under Charges, click Charge Preferential Pricing.
Under Charge Preferential Pricing, click View Preferential Pricing.
The View Preferential Pricing screen displays.

Figure 2-48 View Preferential Pricing

2-83
 Chapter 2
Insurance Maintenance

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Program, Party,
Customer Category, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.7 Insurance Maintenance

This topic describes the information to maintain details of the insurance company from where
the banks intends to purchase insurance policies for covering the default risk of the debtor/
borrower corporate.
Details of various insurance policies availed through that insurance agent can also be
maintained. Individual policies can be linked to debtor/borrower party to track limit related
exposure at policy level.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Insurance
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create insurance details.
• View Insurance
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize
insurance records that have been created.

2.7.1 Create Insurance

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create insurance details.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.

2-84
 Chapter 2
Insurance Maintenance

2. Under Maintenance, click Insurance. Under Insurance, click Create Insurance.

The Create Insurance screen displays.

Figure 2-49 Create Insurance

3. Specify the fields on Create Insurance screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-30 Create Insurance - Field Description

Field Name Description

Insurance Co Name Specify the name of the insurance company.
Short Name Specify the short name of the insurance company, if any.
Address Line 1 Specify the contact address of the insurance company.
Address Line 2 Continue specifying the contact address of the insurance company, if
required.
Address Line 3 Continue specifying the contact address of the insurance company, if
required.
Zip Code Specify the valid postal code belonging to the mentioned address.
Country Specify the country of the mentioned address.
Email Id Specify the communication e-mail address.
Contact Number Specify the contact number of the insurance company.
Fax Specify the fax number of the insurance company.
Contact Person Specify the contact person’s name from the insurance company.
Contact Person Number Specify the phone number of the mentioned contact person.
Contact Person Email Specify the e-mail address of the contact person.

2-85
 Chapter 2
Insurance Maintenance

Table 2-30 (Cont.) Create Insurance - Field Description

Field Name Description

Policy Currency Select the currency in which the insurance is subscribed.
Insurer Limit Specify the maximum insurance amount limit to be given to the
insurer.
Insurer Allocated Amount Displays the insurance amount already allocated to the insurer out of
the Insurer limit.
Insurer Available Amount Displays the available limit that can be claimed.
Insurance Policy Details This section displays the following fields to specify the
insurance policy details for creating an insurance record.
Insurance Policy Number Specify the insurance policy number.
Policy Effective Date Specify the policy start date as mentioned on the policy certificate.
Policy Expiry Date Specify the policy end date as mentioned on the policy certificate.
Policy Amount Specify the total insured amount mentioned in the policy.
Policy Claimed Amount Specify the amount already claimed from the total policy amount, if
any.
Policy Allocated Amount Displays the amount allocated to the specific policy.
Policy Available Amount Displays the available amount in the specific policy post the claims
made.

4. Click Add/Edit to add the details to the grid.

5. Click Reset to reset the rows in the grid.
6. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid:
a. Click Edit to modify the details.
b. Click Delete to remove the record.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.7.2 View Insurance

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize insurance
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Insurance. Under Insurance, click View Insurance.
The View Insurance screen displays.

2-86
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Figure 2-50 View Insurance

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Insurance Co Id,
Insurance Co Name, Short Name, Zip Code, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.8 Interest Maintenance

This topic describes the information to maintain the interest in Supply Chain Finance system.
Banks levies interest on the borrower party basis the parameters such as loan amount, tenor,
etc. Interest pricing is determined by configuring various pricing methods such as fixed rate
type, floating rate type, interest basis, and so on. The interest payment schedule, and
collection period can also be defined for the interest.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Interest Pricing
This topic describes the information to configure the template for interest pricing. Once
created the same can be linked to a product/program/party through Interest Decisioning.

2-87
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

• Interest Rate Decisioning

This topic describes the information to map the pricing rule or template to appropriate
product/program/party.

2.8.1 Interest Pricing

This topic describes the information to configure the template for interest pricing. Once created
the same can be linked to a product/program/party through Interest Decisioning.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Interest Pricing
This topic describes the systematic instruction to define rules for interest pricing based on
the bank’s requirements.
• View Interest Pricing
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize interest
pricing records that have been created.

2.8.1.1 Create Interest Pricing

This topic describes the systematic instruction to define rules for interest pricing based on the
bank’s requirements.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Interest. Under Interest, click Interest Pricing.
3. Under Interest Pricing, click Create Interest Pricing.
The Create Interest Pricing screen displays.

Figure 2-51 Create Interest Pricing

4. Specify the fields on Create Interest Pricing screen.

2-88
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-31 Create Interest Pricing - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pricing Description Specify a description for the interest pricing.
Rate Type Select whether the rate type is Fixed or Floating.
Fixed Rate Type Select whether the fixed rate should be Standard or User Input.
This field is displayed only if the Rate Type is selected as Fixed.
Rate Specify the interest pricing rate.
This field is displayed only if the Fixed Rate Type is selected as
User Input.
Alternative Risk Free Rate Select Yes if the rate code needs to be risk free. Else select No.
This field is displayed only if the Rate Type is selected as Floating.
Interest Basis Select the basis for calculation of interest.
The available options are:
• Actual/Actual
• Actual/360
• Actual/365
Rate Code Select the base rate code. Required base rates can be configured
and are listed in this field.
Some of the rate code options are:
• Secured Overnight Finance Rates
• Swiss Average Rate Overnight
• Sterling Overnight Index Average
• EURO Short Term Rate
This field is disabled if the Fixed Rate Type is selected as User
Input.
Rate Calculation Type Select the type of rate calculation.
The available options are:
• Down
• Interpolate
• Round
• Up
This field is displayed only if the Rate Type is selected as Floating.
Rate Code Usage Select whether the rate should be updated automatically whenever
there is a base rate change or updated periodically.
This field is displayed only if the Rate Type is selected as Floating.
Reset Tenor Specify the tenor to reset the floating rate (in days).
This field is displayed only if the Rate Type is selected as Floating.

2-89
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Table 2-31 (Cont.) Create Interest Pricing - Field Description

Field Name Description

Rate Revision Frequency Select the frequency of updating the rate.
The available options are:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Half Yearly
This field is displayed only if the Rate Code Usage is selected as
Periodic.
Tier Based Spread Select Yes if the spread is tier-based. Else select No.
Spread Specify the spread value.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Based Spread is selected as
No.
Tier Type Select the tier type for applying the spread.
The available options are:
• Amount Based
• Amount and Tenor Based
• Tenor Based
This field is displayed only if the Tier Based Spread is selected as
Yes.
Spread Application Select Slab to apply the spread slab-wise and Variable to apply it
variable-wise.
This field is enabled only if the Tier Type is selected as Tenor
Based.
Amount/Tenor Based This section displays the following fields to specify spread
Spread details for the interest pricing.
Currency Select the currency of spread.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Type is selected as Amount
Based or Amount and Tenor Based.
From Amount Displays the lower limit for the amount based spread.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Type is selected as Amount
Based or Amount and Tenor Based.
To Amount Specify the upper limit for the amount based spread.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Type is selected as Amount
Based or Amount and Tenor Based.
From Tenor Displays the lower limit for the tenor based spread.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Type is selected as Amount
and Tenor Based or Tenor Based.
To Tenor Specify the upper limit for the tenor based spread.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Type is selected as Amount
and Tenor Based or Tenor Based.
Spread Specify the spread value for amount or tenor.
This field is displayed only if the Tier Based Spread is selected as
Yes.
RFR Details This section appears only if Alternative Risk Free Rate is
selected as Yes.

2-90
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Table 2-31 (Cont.) Create Interest Pricing - Field Description

Field Name Description

RFR Method Select the applicable risk free rate method.
• Index Value
• Interest Rollover
• Last Recent
• Last Reset
• Lockout
• Look Back
• Plain
You can select Look Back and Lock Out together. Remaining
methods can be selected standalone only.
Lockout Days Specify the applicable lockout days.
Look Back Days Specify the applicable look back days.
Rate Compounding Select the checkbox if the rate has to be compounded.
RFR Rounding Unit Specify the risk free rate rounding unit as agreed with the borrower.
This field is displayed only if Rate Compounding checkbox is
selected.

5. If Alternative Risk Free Rate field is set to Yes, then RFR Details section gets displayed.
a. Click the RFR Method field to select the applicable risk free rate method.
b. If Lockout or Look Back methods are selected, specify the values accordingly in the
respective fields.
c. Click the Rate Compounding checkbox to specify the risk free rate rounding value, if
applicable.
6. If the Tier Based Spread field is set to Yes, then select the required Tier Type list.
a. Based on the Tier Type selected, specify the tier and spread details.
b. Click Add/Edit to add the spread details to the grid.
c. Repeat the steps to add more tiers, if required.
d. Click Reset to clear the entered values.
e. Select the record in the grid and then click Options icon in the Action column.
f. Click Edit to edit the selected row.
g. Click Delete to delete the selected row.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.8.1.2 View Interest Pricing

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize interest
pricing records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.

2-91
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Interest. Under Interest, click Interest Pricing. Under Interest
Pricing, click View Interest Pricing.
The View Interest Pricing screen displays.

Figure 2-52 View Interest Pricing

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Pricing Id,
Pricing Description, Rate Type, Authorization Status, and Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2-92
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

2.8.2 Interest Rate Decisioning

This topic describes the information to map the pricing rule or template to appropriate product/
program/party.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Interest Rate Decisioning
This topic describes the systematic instruction to map the interest pricing rule or template
to appropriate product/program/party.
• View Interest Rate Decisioning
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize interest
rate decisioning records that have been created.

2.8.2.1 Create Interest Rate Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to map the interest pricing rule or template to
appropriate product/program/party.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Interest. Under Interest, click Interest Rate Decisioning.
3. Under Interest Rate Decisioning, click Create Interest Rate Decisioning.
The Create Interest Rate Decisioning screen displays.

Figure 2-53 Create Interest Rate Decisioning

4. Specify the fields on Create Interest Rate Decisioning screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

2-93
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Table 2-32 Create Interest Rate Decisioning - Field Description

Field Name Description

Product Select the product to create the rate decisioning for.
Effective Date Click the calendar icon to select the date from when the rate
decisioning is effective.
Expiry Date Click the calendar icon to select the date when the rate decisioning
expires.
Filter Criteria Select the appropriate filter criteria for the rate decisioning.
The available options are:
• Program Party Based
• Party Based
• Program Based
• Program Customer Category Based
• Customer Category Based
• Default
Program Click the search icon to select the program for which the interest rate
is to be mapped.

This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as

Program Based.

Party Click the search icon to select the party for which the interest rate is
to be mapped.

This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as

Party Based.

Customer Category Click the search icon to select the customer category for which the
interest rate is to be mapped.

This field appears only if the Filter Criteria is selected as

Customer Category Based.

Interest Pricing Click the search icon to select the interest pricing to be applied for
the rate decisioning.
Interest Component Select the interest component.
The available options are:
• Interest
• Penalty on Principal
• Penalty on Interest

This field is defaulted to Interest if the Interest Pricing

selected is defined as a risk free rate, and the RFR Method is
selected as Lockout or Interest Rollover.

Interest Collection Type Select whether the interest collection type is Front Ended or Rear
Ended.
• This field is defaulted to the Rear Ended if the Interest
Component is selected as Penalty on Principal or Penalty on
Interest.
• This field is defaulted to Rear Ended if the Interest Pricing
selected is defined as a risk free rate, and the RFR Method is
selected as Look Back, Lockout, Interest Rollover or Plain.

2-94
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

Table 2-32 (Cont.) Create Interest Rate Decisioning - Field Description

Field Name Description

Schedule Type Select whether the interest rate scheduling type is Compounding or
Normal.

This field is defaulted to Normal if the Interest Collection

Type is selected as Front Ended and the Interest
Component is selected as Interest.

Spread/Margin Select whether the spread/margin computation method is

Computation Method Compounding or Normal.

This field is displayed only if the Interest Pricing selected is

defined as a risk free rate.

Spread Adjustment Select whether the spread adjustment computation method is

Computation Method Compounding or Normal.

This field is displayed only if the Interest Pricing selected is

defined as a risk free rate.

Rate Compounding Select the rate compounding method.

Method The available options are:
• CCR (Cumulative Compounding Rate)
• NCCR (Non Cumulative Compounding Rate)

This field is displayed only if the Interest Pricing selected is

defined as a risk free rate, and Rate Compounding checkbox
is selected.

Adhoc Pricing Switch the toggle ON to enable adhoc pricing if the adhoc limits are
utilized during finance disbursement.
Interest Payment Schedule Select whether the interest collection schedule is Bullet or Monthly.

This field is displayed only if Interest Collection Type is

selected as Rear Ended and Interest Component is selected
as Interest.

Interest Collection Period Select the time period of the month for interest collection. This is
calculated from the disbursement date.
The available options are:
• End of Period - The interest will be collected on the last working
day of the month.
• Beginning of Period - The interest will be collected on the 1st
working day of the next month.
• Value Date - The interest will be collected on the same date as
the disbursement for the subsequent months.

This field is displayed only if Interest Payment Schedule is

selected as Monthly.

Holiday Treatment Select the day to consider if the interest date falls on a holiday.
The available options are:
• Next Business Date
• Previous Business Date

5. Click Add/Edit to add the details to the grid.

2-95
 Chapter 2
Interest Maintenance

6. Perform the following steps to take action on the records in the grid:
a. Select the record in the grid and then click Options icon in the Action column.
b. Click Edit to edit the selected row.
c. Click Delete to delete the selected row.
7. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.8.2.2 View Interest Rate Decisioning

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize interest rate
decisioning records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Interest. Under Interest, click Interest Rate Decisioning.
Under Interest Rate Decisioning, click View Interest Rate Decisioning.
The View Interest Rate Decisioning screen displays.

Figure 2-54 View Interest Rate Decisioning

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Program, Party,
Product, Customer Category, Effective Date, Expiry Date, Authorization Status, and
Record Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:
a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.

2-96
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires

necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2.9 Limits Structure Maintenance

This topic describes the information to configure limit structures by mapping various limit types
to appropriate entities.
Banks can configure hierarchical limit structures by mapping various limit types like finance,
credit cover, recourse, and so on, to appropriate entities such as Buyer, Supplier, Import factor,
and so on. Sub limits such as product, program and so on, for buyer/supplier parties can also
be configured to enable bank to control the exposure at sub limit level. Each entity like buyer,
supplier, product, and so on forms a node in the structure.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Create Limits Structure
This topic describes the systematic instruction to create limit structures.
• View Limits
This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize limits
records that have been created.

2.9.1 Create Limits Structure

This topic describes the systematic instruction to create limit structures.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Limits Structure. Under Limits Structure, click Create Limits.
The Create Limits screen displays.

2-97
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Figure 2-55 Create Limits

3. Specify the fields on Create Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-33 Create Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Structure Description Specify the description for the limits structure being created.
Limit Type Select the type of limit to map with the entity.
The available options are:
• Advance Payment
• Assignment
• Concentrate
• Credit Cover
• Finance
• Invoice
• Main
• Recourse
• Non-Recourse
• Committed
• Uncommitted
Entity Select the entity for which limits should be set.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Import Factor
• Insurance Company
• Pool
• Product
• Program
• Supplier
Buyer Click the search icon to select the buyer for whom the limit needs to
be defined.
Import Factor Click the search icon to select the import factor for whom the limit
needs to be defined.
Insurance Company Click the search icon to select the insurance company for whom the
limit needs to be defined.

2-98
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Table 2-33 (Cont.) Create Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pool Id Click the search icon to select the pool id for whom the limit needs to
be defined.
Pool Description Specify the description for the pool id selected.
Product Click the search icon to select the product for whom the limit needs
to be defined.
Program Click the search icon to select the program for whom the limit needs
to be defined.
Supplier Click the search icon to select the supplier for whom the limit needs
to be defined.

4. Click Add to add the selected entity to the structure pane.

A tile or a node for the entity is created in the structure pane.

Figure 2-56 Entity added to Structure Pane

5. Click the

icon in the main node to create a child node.

An overlay window displays. Select the limit type, entity and the entity details to add a child
node under the main node.

2-99
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Figure 2-57 Create Limits - Child Node Overlay

6. Repeat the above step to create the entire limits structure. The number of immediate child
nodes of a parent node appears in the tile of that parent node.

Figure 2-58 Child Node added to main entity in the Structure pane

• Click the Tree View icon to view the limits structure in a hierarchical format.
• Click the Table View icon to view the limits structure in a tabular format.
• Use the mini navigation window in the bottom right corner to pan across the limits
structure.
7. To define the limit parameters for a particular node/entity, click Options and click Edit.
The Limit Details screen for the selected entity node displays.

2-100
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Figure 2-59 Create Limits - Limit Details

8. Specify the fields on Create Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 2-34 Limit Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Limit Type Displays the type of limit selected.
Entity Displays the entity for which the limit is being defined.
Entity Id / Code Displays the unique ID or code of the selected entity.
Entity Name Displays the name of the selected entity.
External Line Id Click the search icon to select the limit line ID in case the limits are to
be retrieved from an external system. The sanctioned limit is fetched
from the external system and populated in Sanctioned Limit, which
then cannot be edited.
Limit Currency Select the currency in which the limits are to be defined.

2-101
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Table 2-34 (Cont.) Limit Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Limit Freeze Switch this toggle ON to stop all limit-booking transactions in which
the entity is involved, with respect to the limit structure. The
transactions can be finance disbursement for invoices, purchase
orders, or debit notes.
Releasing of limits are however not affected by this toggle. Therefore,
transactions such as settlements, continue to be processed even if
this toggle is switched ON.
Add Policy Switch this toggle ON to link an insurance policy to the entity.

This toggle appears only for a Buyer or Supplier entity type,

when the main node is Insurance Company.

Link Policy Click the search icon to select the required insurance policy to link.

This field is displayed only if the Add Policy toggle is enabled.

Policy Allocation Amount Specify the amount to be allocated from the policy. By default, the
actual policy amount is displayed.

This field is displayed only if the Add Policy toggle is enabled.

Add Click this button to add the selected policy to the grid.
Reset Click this button to clear the selected values in the fields.
Overall Approved Limit Displays the overall approved limit for the selected entity.
Sanctioned Limit Specify the limit amount to be allotted to the entity for the selected
limit type.
If an external limits system is linked, this field displays the limit value
fetched from the system and the field becomes non-editable.
Available Limit Displays the limit amount that is available to the entity.
Utilized Limit Displays the limit amount that has been utilized.
Blocked Limit Displays the limit amount that has been blocked or reserved for in
progress transactions.
Effective From Click the calendar icon and select the date from when the limit is
effective.
Expires On Click the calendar icon and select the date when the limit expires.
Adhoc Limit Specify the adhoc amount to be allotted if the available limit falls
short of the required amount for a specific transaction.
Available Adhoc Limit Displays the adhoc limit that is available to the entity.
Utilized Adhoc Limit Displays the adhoc limit amount that has been utilized.
Blocked Adhoc Limit Displays the adhoc limit amount that has been blocked or reserved
for in progress transactions.
Adhoc Limit Effective Date Click the calendar icon and select the date from when the adhoc limit
is effective.
Adhoc Limit Expiry Date Click the calendar icon and select the date when the adhoc limit
expires.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the parent entity’s limit currency
and the child entity’s limit currency.

2-102
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Table 2-34 (Cont.) Limit Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Interchangeability Allowed Switch this toggle ON to set the sanctioned limit of each child entity
to the same value as that of the parent entity.
If this toggle is switched off, then the sum of sanctioned limits of all
child entities cannot exceed (must be less than or equal) that of the
parent entity.
Add Structure Switch the toggle ON to link an existing limit structure to the entity.
This linking can only be done for Buyer or Supplier entity types. This
feature is used for linking the insurance or import factor limits to the
buyer/supplier.
Root Entity Select the root entity to be added.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Link Structure Click the search icon to select the required structure to link.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

% Allocation Displays the allocated limit percentage for the entity. This field
displays the following value: (Sanctioned Limit + Adhoc Limit)/Total
Sanctioned Limit.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

View Details Click this hyperlink to view the details of the linked structure.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Add Click this button to add the limit structure to the grid.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Reset Click this button to clear the selected values.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Total Sanctioned Limit Displays the total sanctioned limit.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Total Available Limit Displays the total available limit.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Total Utilized Limit Displays the total utilized limit.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Total Block Limit Displays the total blocked limit.

This field is displayed only if Add Structure toggle is enabled.

Add Earmark Limits Switch this toggle ON to block the limits for the child node under the
parent node's limit. By default, this switch is OFF.
This toggle switch is displayed only in the Create Limits screen of
the child nodes, if the following conditions are satisfied.
• Entity of the parent node is selected as Supplier, and the child
node is selected as Buyer.
• External Line Id is selected for the parent node.

2-103
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

Table 2-34 (Cont.) Limit Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Earmark Limit Specify the limit to be earmarked for the child node within the
approved limit of the parent node.

This field is displayed only if Add Earmark Limits toggle

switch is enabled.

Earmark Available Limit Displays the earmarked limit currently available.

This field is displayed only if Add Earmark Limits toggle

switch is enabled.

Earmark Effective From Click the calendar icon and select the date from when the earmarked
limit is effective.

This field is displayed only if Add Earmark Limits toggle

switch is enabled.

Earmark Expires On Click the calendar icon and select the date when the earmarked limit
expires.

This field is displayed only if Add Earmark Limits toggle

switch is enabled.

Earmark Reference No. Displays the reference number of the earmarked limit fetched from
the external system.

This field is displayed only if Add Earmark Limits toggle

switch is enabled.

9. Click Add Details to save the limit details for the entity.
The sum of the sanctioned and adhoc limits appears in the node tile.

Figure 2-60 Post Addition of Limit Details

Note:
If the Limits Freeze toggle is enabled for a specific node, then it is displayed in
the node tile.

2-104
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

10. Perform the following steps to take action on the entity nodes.
• Click Options in any node and click Edit to modify the limit details, if required.
• Click Options in the main entity node and click Delete Hierarchy to delete all the
nodes created.
• Click Options in the child entity node and click Delete to delete the particular node.
11. Click Save to save the record and send it for authorization.

2.9.2 View Limits

This topic describes the systematic instruction to view, modify, delete, or authorize limits
records that have been created.
A tile is present for each record that has been created. The bottom portion of each record-tile
displays the following:
• The status, whether Authorized, Unauthorized, or Rejected
• Open or Closed
• The number of times the record has been submitted by the Maker added.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Maintenance.
2. Under Maintenance, click Limits Structure. Under Limits Structure, click View Limits.
The View Limits screen displays.

Figure 2-61 View Limits

3. Filter the records in the View screen:

a. Click Search icon to view the filters. The user can filter the records by Structure
Description, Limit Type, Entity Type, Entity Id, Entity Description, Record Status, and
Authorization Status.
b. Select the required filter criteria and click Search button to filter the records.
c. Click Reset to reset the filter criteria.
4. Click Refresh icon to refresh the records.
5. Click Options icon and then, select any of the following options:

2-105
 Chapter 2
Limits Structure Maintenance

a. Unlock – To modify the record details. Refer to the Create screen for the field level
details.
b. Authorize – To authorize or reject the record. Authorizing/Rejecting requires
necessary access rights.
• Optional: Click View to view the record details.
• Select the record and click Approve to approve the record.
• Select the record and click Reject to reject the record. Specify the relevant
comments in the pop-up window that appears, and click Confirm.
c. Delete/Close – To remove the record.
• Optional: In the confirmation pop-up window, click View to view the record details.
• Click Proceed to delete the record.
d. Copy – To copy the record parameters for creating a new record.
e. View – To view the record details.
f. Reopen – To reopen the closed record.

2-106
3
Finance Disbursement
This topic describes the information on the disbursement initiation and processing of the
disbursement task.
The Bank user can manually initiate a finance on behalf of a corporate customer, for funds
required against financial instruments such as invoices, debit notes, and purchase orders. To
initiate finances manually, refer to Initiate Finance section in Receivables and Payables
User Guide.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Processing Disbursement Task
This topic describes the steps to process the disbursement record.

3.1 Processing Disbursement Task

This topic describes the steps to process the disbursement record.
When a finance is manually initiated, a disbursement task is created in the system.
Manual disbursement tasks are also generated in the following cases:
• When automatic disbursement fails.
• When a borrower has overdue transactions (only if the configuration flag Allow Auto
Processing for Overdue Borrowers has been disabled).
• When a borrower is delinquent (only if the configuration flag Allow Disbursements for
NPA Borrowers has been enabled).
• When finance is initiated for overdue invoices and debit notes.

Note:
Only authorized users can process and authorize the disbursement tasks.

The disbursement tasks are segregated into the following data segments:
• Basic Info
• Pre-Shipment Liquidation
• Party
• Limits
• Interest
• Charges
• Accounting
• Summary
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

3-1
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Tasks.
2. Under Tasks, click Finance. Under Finance, click Free Tasks.
The Finance - Free Tasks screen displays.

Figure 3-1 Finance - Free Tasks

3. Perform any of the below action from the Free Tasks screen.
• Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required disbursement tasks to process.
• Select the checkbox of the required tasks and click Acquire button above the grid to
acquire multiple tasks. Once you acquire a task, it is moved to the My Tasks list. You
can then navigate to My Tasks screen and click Edit link beside the required
disbursement tasks to process.

Note:
The following information is displayed at the top of the disbursement tasks
screen for each data segment.
• The reference number, the stage, and the operation name of the transaction
acquired for processing.
• Click Remarks button to add any comments about the transaction .
• Click Documents button to upload any new documents or view the uploaded
documents relevant to the transaction.

Basic Info
4. Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required disbursement tasks.
The Basic Info screen displays.

3-2
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Figure 3-2 Disbursement - Basic Info

5. Specify the fields on Basic Info screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-1 Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Select the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Specify the start date of the finance. By default, this field displays the
current business date.
For back-dated disbursements, the Start Date displays the Funding
Request Date. The following warning appears for the back-dated
disbursements, "You are initiating a Back-dated Disbursement
request. Please confirm if you want to continue?". Click Yes to
proceed.
Tenor Specify the tenor of the finance. It should be lesser than the
maximum tenor and greater than the minimum tenor as defined in
product/program and spoke parameter.
The tenor of the finance gets defaulted basis start date and maturity
date.
Maturity Date Specify the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets calculated
basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Specify the number of days, post maturity, within which the finance
can be repaid without incurring penalty.

3-3
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-1 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Past Due Date Specify the new maturity date post the initial finance maturity date.
By default, the date displayed is Maturity Date + Grace Days.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Currency Select the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Preferred Disbursement Select the preferred mode of finance disbursement.
Mode The available options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Adhoc Limits Utilized This checkbox is auto-selected if adhoc limits are being utilized in the
transaction.
Skip Pre-Shipment Switch the toggle ON to skip the liquidation of Pre-Shipment finance
Liquidation from the proceeds of the post-shipment finance.
This field is displayed only if any outstanding pre-shipment finance is
identified for the respective parties of the post-shipment finance.
Channel Displays the source application from which the transaction is
initiated.

6. Perform any of the below actions from the Basic Info screen.
• Click Next to go to the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Pre-Shipment Liquidation
Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen displays the details of the pre-shipment finances which will be
liquidated on completion of the post-shipment disbursement. This tab is displayed only if the
Skip Pre-Shipment Liquidation toggle is disabled and if there are any outstanding pre-
shipment finances identified for the buyer-seller combination.
7. Click Next on the Basic Info tab.

3-4
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

The Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen displays.

Figure 3-3 Disbursement - Pre-Shipment Liquidation

8. Specify the fields on Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-2 Pre-Shipment Liquidation - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.

3-5
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-2 (Cont.) Pre-Shipment Liquidation - Field Description

Field Name Description

Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
Pre-Shipment to be The list of pre-shipment finances to be liquidated are displayed
Liquidated in this section.
Finance Reference Displays the reference number of the pre-shipment finance settled.
Number Click the hyperlink data to view more details of the finance.
Finance Due Date Displays the maturity date of the pre-shipment finance.
Finance Outstanding Displays the total outstanding amount of the pre-shipment finance.
Finance Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the total outstanding of the
(Invoice Finance pre-shipment finance in invoice currency.
Currency)
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between invoice finance currency and
PO finance currency.
Finance Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the total outstanding of the
(Purchase Order Finance pre-shipment finance in purchase order currency.
Currency)
Principal Outstanding Displays the outstanding principal amount of the pre-shipment
finance.
Principal Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding principal
of the pre-shipment finance.
Interest Outstanding Displays the outstanding interest amount of the pre-shipment
finance.
Interest Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding interest of
the pre-shipment finance.
Penalty On Interest Displays the outstanding penalty on interest amount of the pre-
Outstanding shipment finance.
Penalty On Interest Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding penalty on
Appropriated interest of the pre-shipment finance.
Penalty On Principal Displays the outstanding penalty on principal amount of the pre-
Outstanding shipment finance.
Penalty On Principal Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding penalty on
Appropriated principal of the pre-shipment finance.

9. Perform any of the below actions from the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.
• Click Next to go to the Party screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

3-6
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

• Click Back to go to the Basic Info screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
• The following options are displayed only if there are any errors in appropriating pre-
shipment settlements and the transaction moves to PrePostConversionException
stage.
– Click Retry to reappropirate the pre-shipment settlement.
– Click Approve to approve the transactions with the errors i.e., the transactions
with errors that are skipped in the liquidation sequence.
Party
10. Click Next on the Pre-Shipment Liquidation tab.
The Party screen displays.

Figure 3-4 Disbursement - Party

11. Specify the fields on Party screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-3 Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.

3-7
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-3 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Party Details Parties with specific roles in the program can be added in this
section.
Party Details Select the party role to be added.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
• Import Factor
• Export Factor
• Insurance
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
Search Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Division Click the search icon to select the division code of the party.
Address Specify the address of the selected party.
Add New Row Click this button to add the selected party to the grid.
Party Role Displays the role of the party.
Party Id Displays the unique ID of the party.
Party Name Displays the name of the party
Address Displays the address of the party.

3-8
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-3 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Division Code Displays the division code of the party.
Division Name Displays the division name of the party.
Action Click Options icon to view the actions that can be taken on the party
record.

12. Perform the following steps to take action on the parties in the grid:

• Click Add New Row to add more parties.

• Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Actions column and
then click Delete to remove the party.
13. Perform any of the below actions from the Party screen.

• Click Next to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Limits
Limits are assigned to corporate parties and their associated entities (counter parties,
products, programs, and so on) for the finances being requested. In some cases, apart from
the sanctioned main limits, adhoc limits are also assigned to these entities. Adhoc limits will be
booked once the main limits are exhausted. In other words, adhoc limits are utilized if a finance
request exceeds the available main limits, but not the total available limits. In such cases, two
separate disbursement transactions are created – one for the main limits utilized, and one for
the adhoc limits utilized. The interest rates applicable may also differ for the finance availed
under the main limit and the finance availed under the adhoc limit.
If there is a limit freeze on any of the entities involved, then the disbursement transaction
cannot be processed. It can only be processed once the limit freeze is lifted.
14. Click Next on the Party tab.

The Limits screen displays.

3-9
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Figure 3-5 Disbursement - Limits

Note:
When the main limits are being utilized, the Limit Details grid displays details
related to the main limits. You can add columns related to the adhoc limits by
clicking Add/Remove Columns icon, if required. If adhoc limits are being
utilized, then the Limit Details grid displays the Sanctioned Adhoc Amount,
Utilized Adhoc Amount, and Available Adhoc Amount columns. You can add the
columns related to the Main Limits using Add/Remove Columns icon, if
required.

15. Specify the fields on Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-4 Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.

3-10
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-4 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Limit Details Limit details of the entity that is being financed is displayed in
this section.
Limit Type Displays a label of the entity and the linked limit type.
Entity Displays the entity – Anchor / Product / Program / Spoke and so on.
Entity Name Displays the name of the entity.
Breach Type Displays any limit breach exception that has occurred with respect to
the entity. (Limits Frozen, Amount Breach, Limits Expired).
Processing Outcome Displays the action that will be taken on the limit as a result of
disbursement.
• Utilize - If the limit is being booked.
• Stop - If in case of an exception, the transaction should be
blocked and not allowed to be processed further.
• Skip - If in case of an exception, the transaction is to be
processed without limit booking.
This behavior is driven by the credit limit mapping as configured in
product parameters.
Amount Displays the finance amount.
Line Ccy Displays the currency of the limit line.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the finance amount currency
and the line currency.
Amount (In line CCY) Displays the finance amount in line currency.
Sanctioned Amount Displays the limit amount assigned to the entity.
Total Blocked Amount Displays the total amount that has been blocked for finances that are
currently being processed, with respect to the entity.
Total Utilized Amount Displays the limit amount that has already been utilized.

3-11
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-4 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Available Amount Displays the limit amount available for financing.
Line Id Displays the unique ID of the limit line of the entity.
Action Displays the action being taken on the finance amount earmarked for
disbursement.
Actual Available Limits Displays the actual limit available to the entity for financing.

16. Perform any of the below actions from the Limits screen.

• Click Next to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Party screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Interest
17. Click Next on the Limits tab.

The Interest screen displays.

3-12
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Figure 3-6 Disbursement - Interest

18. Specify the fields on Interest screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-5 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.

3-13
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-5 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Interest and Penalty Interest, Penalty on Principal, and Penalty on Interest details of
Amount Details the finance is displayed in this section.
Interest Amount Displays the interest amount that has been calculated.
Penalty on Principal Displays the penalty on the outstanding principal that has been
calculated, if any.
Penalty on Interest Displays the penalty on the outstanding interest that has been
calculated, if any.
Interest Details Interest details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.

3-14
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-5 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Additional Details Click this link to view additional interest details.
• Interest Additional Details - Displays additional information
related to the interest.
• Interest Payment Schedule - Displays the details of periodic
interest dues for monthly rest transactions.
Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on principal.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on interest.

19. Perform any of the below actions from the Interest screen.

• Click Next to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

3-15
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Charges
20. Click Next on the Interest tab.

The Charges screen displays.

Figure 3-7 Disbursement - Charges

21. Specify the fields on Charges screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-6 Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.

3-16
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-6 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Charge Details Charge details of the finance is displayed in this section.

Charge Displays the charge code.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
This field becomes editable if Modify Pricing radio button is selected
in the Actions column.
Click the search icon in the Charge Pricing Rule column. The
Charge Pricing Rule pop-up screen displays.
a. Enter complete or partial value in the Charge Pricing Id or
Charge Pricing Description fields .
b. Click Fetch. The relevant pricing rule(s) displays.
c. Select the pricing rule to be applied.

Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.

3-17
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-6 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Actions Displays the below radio buttons.
• Waive – Click the button to waive the charge amount. If
selected, the charge amount field defaults to zero.
• Override – Click the button to modify the existing charge
amount . For Charge Collection Type selected as Periodic, the
override charge amount entered will be proportionately adjusted
across the schedule.
• Modify Pricing – Click the button to modify the charge pricing
rule. Charge Pricing Rule field becomes editable to select a
different pricing rule.
• Reset – Click the button to reset to the original calculation of
charges and charge pricing rule.
These fields are enabled or disabled as per the charge maintenance
parameters set in the Charge Decisioning and the Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the disbursement transaction is viewed from
checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.

22. Click the link in the Details column to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.

3-18
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Figure 3-8 Charge Details

Figure 3-9 Schedule of Charges

23. Perform any of the below actions from the Charges screen.

• Click Next to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

3-19
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Accounting
24. Click Next on the Charges tab.

The Accounting screen displays.

Figure 3-10 Disbursement - Accounting

25. Specify the fields on Accounting screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 3-7 Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.

3-20
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Table 3-7 (Cont.) Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
disbursement initiation stage.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Accounting Details Accounting details of the finance is displayed in this section.

Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.

26. Perform any of the below actions from the Accounting screen.

• Click Next to go to the Summary screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

3-21
 Chapter 3
Processing Disbursement Task

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Summary
The Disbursement Summary screen shows a snapshot of the complete disbursement
transaction along with finance amount, interest applicable, terms, and so on. A tile is displayed
for each data segment.
27. Click Next on the Accounting tab.

The Summary screen displays.

Figure 3-11 Disbursement - Summary

28. Review the details of the disbursement transaction and perform any of the following action
from the Summary screen.
• Click each tile to view the detailed information of the data segments.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement.

Note:
If the Disbursement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

3-22
4
Finance Settlement
This topic describes the information to initiate settlement and processing the settlement task.
Finance Settlement functionality enables the banks to settle outstanding finances/loans for
corporate customers in the supply chain finance system. Based on the party's role, you can
initiate the settlement of a loan on behalf of the corporate customer. The settlement request
can either be initiated from the Finance Settlement screen or through file upload (payment
file).
The Finance Settlement process involves the below steps:
• Initiate Finance Settlement
This topic describes the systematic instruction to initiate finance settlement to settle the
outstanding finances/loans for corporate customers.
• Processing Settlement Task
This topic describes the steps to process the settlement record.

4.1 Initiate Finance Settlement

This topic describes the systematic instruction to initiate finance settlement to settle the
outstanding finances/loans for corporate customers.
A settlement transaction is initiated automatically based on finance-payment reconciliation, in
which case a settlement task record is created in the Free Tasks.
The user can manually initiate a settlement transaction in the Finance Settlement screen. You
can search and select the finances to settle, and initiate the settlement process. Multiple
finances can be selected for settlement. For each finance reference number you select, a
settlement transaction is created under Free Tasks.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Finance Settlement.
The Finance Settlement screen displays.

Figure 4-1 Finance Settlement - Settlement Details

2. Specify the fields on Settlement Details section to search for the finances against which
settlement needs to be initiated.

4-1
 Chapter 4
Initiate Finance Settlement

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-1 Settlement Details - Field Description

Field Name Description

Settlement Ref No Specify the reference number for the settlement to be initiated.
Payment Ref No Click the search icon to select the payment against which settlement
needs to be initiated. For more information to select the payments,
refer to List of Payments.
Payment Party Role Select the role of the party that is making the payment.
Payment Party Click the search icon to select the name of the party that is making
the payment.
Loan Account Credited Switch the toggle ON, if the loan account is credited with the
settlement amount.
Payment Mode Select the mode of payment for the settlement.
This field is disabled if Loan Account Credited toggle is enabled.
Debit Account Click the search icon to select the account to be displayed as debit
account in the MIS. There is no impact to processing.
This field is displayed only if Loan Account Credited toggle is
disabled.
This field is mandatory if Payment Mode is selected as Account
Transfer.
Credit Account Click the search icon to select the account to be displayed as credit
account in the MIS. There is no impact to processing.
This field is displayed only if Loan Account Credited toggle is
enabled.
Currency Select the currency for the settlement amount.
Settlement Amount Specify the amount being paid by the payment party to settle the
finances.
Settlement Date Click the calendar to select the date of settlement. By default, the
current date is displayed.
Manual Allocation Switch the toggle ON to enable manual allocation of the amount to
settle the finances.
Settlement Amount Select how the settlement amount must be allocated amongst the
Allocation selected finances.
The available options are:
• By Highest Outstanding
• By Lowest Outstanding
• By Latest Due date

3. Perform the below steps to select the payment against which settlement needs to be
initiated.
a. Click the search icon in the Payment Ref No field to select the payment.
The List of Payments pop-up screen displays.

4-2
 Chapter 4
Initiate Finance Settlement

Figure 4-2 List of Payments

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-2 List of Payments - Field Description

Field Name Description

Payment Number Specify the reference number of the payment to search for.
Date Reference Basis Select the value to specify the reference for date criteria.
From Date Click the Calendar icon and specify the start range for the
selected data reference basis.
To Date Click the Calendar icon and specify the end date of range for the
selected data reference basis.
Payment Party Click the search icon to select the payment party to search for.
Counter Party Click the search icon to select the counter-party of the payment to
search for.
Beneficiary Id Click the search icon to select the beneficiary of the payment to
search for.
Payment Mode Select the mode of payment.
Credit Account Number Click the search icon to select the account of the beneficiary.
Payment Currency Select the currency of the payment.
Amount From Specify the start of the amount-range within which the payment
needs to be searched.
Amount To Specify the end of the amount-range within which the payment
needs to be searched.

b. On the List of Payments screen, specify the required search criteria and click Fetch.
The relevant payment records are displayed.
c. Select the records and click OK to select the payments to initiate the settlement.
4. Click Proceed after you specify the required details in the Settlement Details section.
The Filter Parameters section displays, if there are any relevant outstanding finances for
the details specified.

4-3
 Chapter 4
Initiate Finance Settlement

Figure 4-3 Filter Parameter

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-3 Filter Parameter - Field Description

Field Name Description

Finance Reference No Click the search icon to select the outstanding finances using the
finance reference number.
Program Click the search icon to select the outstanding finances based on the
associated program.
Buyer / Supplier Click the search icon to select the outstanding finances based on the
supplier/buyer.
This field displays the role based on the Payment Party Role
selected in the Settlement Details section.
Borrower Click the search icon to select the outstanding finances based on the
borrower.

5. Click Search to search for the outstanding finances.

The list the finance records displays in the grid.

6. Select the checkbox of the required finances against which the settlement needs to be
initiated.
• Review the details of the selected finances in the following fields.
– Total Settlement Amount
– Settlement Amount Allocated
– Balance To Be Allocated

4-4
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

7. Perform any of the following action in the Filter Parameter section.

• Click Reset to reset the details.
• Click the hyperlink in the Finance Reference Number column to view more details on
the finance. The Finance Details pop-up screen displays.

Figure 4-4 Finance Details

8. Click Initiate Settlement to initiate settlement against the selected finances.

A settlement task is created in the system based on the associated program/product
parameters.

4.2 Processing Settlement Task

This topic describes the steps to process the settlement record.
When a finance settlement is initiated, a settlement task is created in the system based on the
associated program/product parameters.
Settlement Tasks are also initiated automatically basis configuration in the following cases:
• When a payment is made against an invoice and an underlying finance is outstanding.
• When invoice disbursement proceeds are used to liquidate outstanding pre-shipment
finances.

Note:
Only authorized users can process and authorize the settlement tasks.

The settlement tasks are segregated into the following data segments:
• Basic Info
• Party
• Limits
• Interest
• Charges
• Accounting
• Summary
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

4-5
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Tasks.
2. Under Tasks, click Finance. Under Finance, click Free Tasks.
The Finance - Free Tasks screen displays.

Figure 4-5 Finance - Free Tasks

3. Perform any of the below action from the Free Tasks screen.
• Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required settlement tasks to process.
• Select the checkbox of the required tasks and click Acquire button above the grid to
acquire multiple tasks. Once you acquire a task, it is moved to the My Tasks list. You
can then navigate to My Tasks screen and click Edit link beside the required
settlement tasks to process.

Note:
The following information is displayed at the top of the settlement tasks screen
for each data segment.
• The reference number, the stage, and the operation name of the transaction
acquired for processing.
• Click Remarks button to add any comments about the transaction .
• Click Documents button to upload any new documents or view the uploaded
documents relevant to the transaction.

Basic Info
4. Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required settlement tasks.
The Basic Info screen displays.

4-6
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Figure 4-6 Settlement - Basic Info

Figure 4-7 Settlement - Basic Info (continued)

5. Specify the fields on Basic Info screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-4 Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Basic Info Basic information of the finance being settled is displayed in
this section.
Branch Displays the branch where the settlement is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.

4-7
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-4 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance amount.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Channel Displays the source application from which the transaction is
initiated.
Settlement Details Settlement details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Settlement Ref No Displays the reference number of the settlement.
Payment Mode Displays the mode of payment of the settlement amount.
Payment Amount Enter the total amount being paid by the payment party.
Payment Party Displays the name of the party making the payment.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the date on which the settlement process was initiated.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the finance currency and the
settlement currency.
Appropriated Payment Displays the amount that is appropriated for the settlement of the
Amount selected finances.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Post-Shipment This section is displayed only when post-shipment
Disbursement Details disbursement proceeds are used to liquidate a pre-shipment
finance.
Finance Reference Displays the reference number of the post-shipment finance. Click
Number the hyperlink in the Finance Reference Number field to view more
details on the finance
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing of the settlement.
Date
Finance Start Date Displays the start date of the finance.
Finance Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount financed.

4-8
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-4 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
Outstanding and Outstanding and Appropriation details of the finance being
Appropriation details settled is displayed in this section.
O/S as on Date Outstanding details of the finance on the current date is
displayed in this section.
Principal O/S Displays the outstanding principal amount as on the current date.
Interest O/S Displays the outstanding interest as on the current date.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due as on the current date.
A hyperlink for the Interest Due field is enabled only if any interest is
due. Click the hyperlink to open the pop-up screen to view the date-
wise calculation details for interest due.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding principal as on the current
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding interest as on the current
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Total O/S Displays the total outstanding amount as on current date.
O/S as on Value/ Outstanding details of the finance on the settlement date is
Settlement Date displayed in this section.
Principal O/S Displays the outstanding principal as on the settlement date.
Interest O/S Displays the outstanding interest as on the settlement date.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due as on the settlement date.
A hyperlink for the Interest Due field is enabled only if any interest is
due. Click the hyperlink to open the pop-up screen to view the date-
wise calculation details for interest due.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding principal as on the
settlement date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding interest as on the settlement
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.
Total O/S Displays the total outstanding amount as on the settlement date.
Appropriation Details Appropriation details of the payment towards the finance is
displayed in this section.

4-9
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-4 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Liquidation Order Displays the actual order in which the components are liquidated.
• I - Interest due Date
• E - Penalty on Interest Start Date
• O - Penalty on Principal Start Date
• F - Finances (Outstanding Finances)
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent)
Appropriation Sequence Specify the appropriation sequence of settlement amount.
• P - Principal Amount
• I - Interest amount
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Payment Towards Specify the amount to be settled against the principal of the finance.
Principal By default, the value entered as the payment amount in the
Settlement Details section is auto-populated.
Payment Towards Interest Specify the amount to be settled against the interest of the finance.
Payment Towards Penalty Specify the amount to be settled against the penalty on principal of
on Principal the finance.
Payment Towards Penalty Specify the amount to be settled against the penalty on interest of
on Interest the finance.
Interest Refund Displays any interest amount to be refunded.
O/S Post Settlement Outstanding details of the finance post settlement is displayed
in this section.
Principal O/S Displays the principal amount that will be outstanding, post
settlement.
Interest O/S Displays the interest amount that will be outstanding, post
settlement.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due amount that will be outstanding,
post settlement.
A hyperlink for the Interest Due field is enabled only if any interest is
due. Click the hyperlink to open the pop-up screen to view the date-
wise calculation details for interest due.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays the penalty on principal amount that will be outstanding,
post settlement.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays the penalty on interest that will be outstanding, post
settlement.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.
Total O/S Displays the total amount that will be outstanding, post settlement.

6. Perform any of the below actions from the Basic Info screen.
• Click Next to go to the Party screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

4-10
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Party
7. Click Next on the Basic Info tab.
The Party screen displays.

Figure 4-8 Settlement - Party

8. Specify the fields on Party screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-5 Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement is being processed.
By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.

4-11
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-5 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement Date/ Value Displays the actual date of settlement.
Date
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Party Details Parties with specific roles in the program can be added in this
section.
Party Details Select the party role to be added.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
• Import Factor
• Export Factor
• Insurance
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
Search Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Division Click the search icon to select the division code of the party.
Address Specify the address of the selected party.
Add New Row Click this button to add the selected party to the grid.
Party Role Displays the role of the party.
Party Id Displays the unique ID of the party.
Party Name Displays the name of the party
Address Displays the address of the party.
Division Code Displays the division code of the party.
Division Name Displays the division name of the party.
Action Click Options icon to view the actions that can be taken on the party
record.

9. Perform the following steps to take action on the parties in the grid:
• Click Add New Row to add more parties.
• Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Actions column and
then click Delete to remove the party.
10. Perform any of the below actions from the Party screen.
• Click Next to go to the Limits screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Basic Info screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.

4-12
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.

• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Limits
11. Click Next on the Party tab.

The Limits screen displays.

Figure 4-9 Settlement - Limits

Note:
When the main limits are being utilized, the Limit Details grid displays details
related to the main limits. You can add columns related to the adhoc limits by
clicking Add/Remove Columns icon, if required. If adhoc limits are being
utilized, then the Limit Details grid displays the Sanctioned Adhoc Amount,
Utilized Adhoc Amount, and Available Adhoc Amount columns. You can add the
columns related to the Main Limits using Add/Remove Columns icon, if
required.

12. Specify the fields on Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-6 Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement is being processed.
By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.

4-13
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-6 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Limit Details Limit details of the entity that is being settled is displayed in this
section.
Limit Type Displays a label of the entity and the linked limit type.
Entity Displays the entity – Anchor / Product / Program / Spoke and so on.
Entity Name Displays the name of the entity.
Breach Type Displays any limit breach exception that has occurred with respect to
the entity. (Limits Frozen, Amount Breach, Limits Expired).
Processing Outcome Displays the action that will be taken on the limit as a result of
settlement.
• Utilize - If the limit is being booked.
• Stop - If in case of an exception, the transaction should be
blocked and not allowed to be processed further.
• Skip - If in case of an exception, the transaction is to be
processed without limit booking.
This behavior is driven by the credit limit mapping as configured in
product parameters.
Amount Displays the settlement amount with respect to the entity.
Line Ccy Displays the currency of the limit line.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the settlement amount currency
and the line currency.
Amount (In line CCY) Displays the settlement amount in line currency.
Sanctioned Amount Displays the limit amount assigned to the entity, in line currency.
Total Blocked Amount Displays the total amount that has been blocked for finances that are
currently being processed, with respect to the entity.
Total Utilized Amount Displays the limit amount that has already been utilized.
Available Amount Displays the limit amount available to the entity for financing.
Line Id Displays the unique ID of the limit line of the entity.
Action Displays the action being taken on the amount being settled.
Actual Available Limits Displays the actual limit available to the entity for financing.

13. Perform any of the below actions from the Limits screen.

• Click Next to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

4-14
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Party screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Interest
14. Click Next on the Limits tab.

The Interest screen displays.

Figure 4-10 Settlement - Interest

15. Specify the fields on Interest screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

4-15
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-7 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement is being processed.
By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Interest and Penalty Interest, Penalty on Principal, and Penalty on Interest details of
Amount Details the finance is displayed in this section.
Interest Amount Displays the interest amount that has been calculated.
Penalty on Principal Displays the penalty on the outstanding principal that has been
calculated, if any.
Penalty on Interest Displays the penalty on the outstanding interest that has been
calculated, if any.
Interest Details Interest details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional interest details.
• Interest Additional Details - Displays additional information
related to the interest.
• Interest Payment Schedule - Displays the details of periodic
interest dues for monthly rest transactions.
Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.

4-16
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-7 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on principal.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on interest.

16. Perform any of the below actions from the Interest screen.

• Click Next to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Charges
17. Click Next on the Interest tab.

The Charges screen displays.

4-17
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Figure 4-11 Settlement - Charges

18. Specify the fields on Charges screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-8 Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement is being processed.
By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Charge Details Charge details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Charge Displays the charge code.

4-18
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-8 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
This field becomes editable if Modify Pricing radio button is selected
in the Actions column.
Click the search icon in the Charge Pricing Rule column. The
Charge Pricing Rule pop-up screen displays.
a. Enter complete or partial value in the Charge Pricing Id or
Charge Pricing Description fields .
b. Click Fetch. The relevant pricing rule(s) displays.
c. Select the pricing rule to be applied.

Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.
Actions Displays the below radio buttons.
• Waive – Click the button to waive the charge amount. If
selected, the charge amount field defaults to zero.
• Override – Click the button to modify the existing charge
amount . For Charge Collection Type selected as Periodic, the
override charge amount entered will be proportionately adjusted
across the schedule.
• Modify Pricing – Click the button to modify the charge pricing
rule. Charge Pricing Rule field becomes editable to select a
different pricing rule.
• Reset – Click the button to reset to the original calculation of
charges and charge pricing rule.
These fields are enabled or disabled as per the charge maintenance
parameters set in the Charge Decisioning and the Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the settlement transaction is viewed from
checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.

19. Click the link in the Details column to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.

4-19
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Figure 4-12 Charge Details

Figure 4-13 Schedule of Charges

20. Perform any of the below actions from the Charges screen.

• Click Next to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

4-20
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Accounting
21. Click Next on the Charges tab.

The Accounting screen displays.

Figure 4-14 Settlement - Accounting

22. Specify the fields on Accounting screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 4-9 Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement is being processed.
By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.

4-21
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Table 4-9 (Cont.) Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Accounting Details Accounting details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.

23. Perform any of the below actions from the Accounting screen.

• Click Next to go to the Summary screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Summary
The Settlement Summary tab shows a snapshot of the complete settlement transaction along
with finance amount, interest applicable, terms, and so on. A tile is displayed for each data
segment.
24. Click Next on the Accounting tab.

The Summary screen displays.

4-22
 Chapter 4
Processing Settlement Task

Figure 4-15 Settlement - Summary

25. Review the details of the settlement transaction and perform any of the following action
from the Summary screen.
• Click each tile to view the detailed information of the data segments.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement.

Note:
If the Settlement Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.
Once approved, the finance gets settled in the core lending system, which in-
turn will return the settlement status to Supply Chain Finance system.

• Click Back to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

4-23
5
Transaction Reversal
This topic describes the process to initiate reversal of disbursement and settlement
transactions.
Transaction Reversal functionality enables the banks to reverse the completed disbursement
and settlement transactions of a finance in the supply chain finance system. Once a
transaction is reversed, it is rolled back completely. The reversal request can be initiated from
the Transaction Reversal screen.
The Transaction Reversal process involves the below steps:
• Initiate Transaction Reversal
This topic describes the systematic steps to initiate reversal of the disbursement and
settlement transactions for corporate customers.
• Processing Disbursement Reversal Task
This topic describes the steps to process the disbursement transaction reversal record.
• Processing Settlement Reversal Task
This topic describes the steps to process the settlement transaction reversal record.

5.1 Initiate Transaction Reversal

This topic describes the systematic steps to initiate reversal of the disbursement and
settlement transactions for corporate customers.
The user can manually initiate a reversal in the Transaction Reversal screen. You can search
and select the finance transactions, and initiate the reversal process. Multiple transactions can
be selected for reversal. For each finance reference number you select, a reversal transaction
is created under Free Tasks.

Note:
The application allows transaction reversal for a finance chronologically i.e., you can
only reverse the latest transaction in the finance lifecycle. For example, if you search
for finance reference number FIN123 and it has two records in its lifecycle, a
disbursement and a partial settlement, the application only displays the settlement
transaction record. You must initiate reversal for settlement transaction first and then
proceed to reverse the disbursement transaction.

Note:
The application lists only the latest transaction record of the finance that are in
complete status. For example, if you search for finance reference number FIN345
and it has two records in its lifecycle, a completed disbursement transaction and an in
progress settlement transaction, the application will not list the finance for reversal.

5-1
 Chapter 5
Initiate Transaction Reversal

Note:
The application will not list the finance for reversal if the latest transaction executed is
an amendment on a finance.

Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Transaction Reversal.
The Transaction Reversal screen displays.

Figure 5-1 Transaction Reversal Initiation - Finance Search

2. Specify the fields on Transaction Reversal screen to search for the finances for which
reversal needs to be initiated.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-1 Transaction Reversal - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Select the account branch.
Finance Reference Specify the reference number to search for the finance.
Number
Finance Status Select the current status of the finance.
The available options are:
• Disbursed
• Disbursement Reversed
• Outstanding
• Overdue
• Partial Settled
• Settled
Product Select the product for which the finance is processed.

5-2
 Chapter 5
Initiate Transaction Reversal

Table 5-1 (Cont.) Transaction Reversal - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Click the search icon to select the program for which the finance is
processed.
Supplier Click the search icon to select the supplier party of the finance.
Buyer Click the search icon to select the buyer party of the finance.
Borrower Click the search icon to select the borrower.
Recent Transactions Select the value to search for the finance transactions in the selected
period.
The available options are:
• Past 2 Days
• Today
• This Week
• Yesterday
• All
Date Reference Basis Select the value to specify the reference for date criteria.
The available options are:
• Finance Date
• Finance Maturity Date
• Processing Date
This field is auto-populated to Processing Date if any of the values
in Recent Transactions is selected.
Date Range Click the calendar icons and select the required starting and ending
ranges for the date to search for the finance.
This field is enabled only if any value is selected in the Date
Reference Basis field.
The date range is auto-populated based on the values selected in
the Recent Transactions field.
Processing Status Select the current processing status to search for the finance.
Delinquency Status Select the current delinquency status to search for the finance.
Currency Select the currency of the finance to search for.
Finance Amount From Specify the start of the amount-range within which the finance needs
to be searched.
Finance Amount To Specify the end of the amount-range within which the finance needs
to be searched.

3. Click Search after you specify the required details.

The list of finance records displays in the grid.

5-3
 Chapter 5
Initiate Transaction Reversal

Figure 5-2 List of Finances

Table 5-2 List of Finances - Field Description

Field Name Description

Finance Reference Displays the reference number of the finance.
Number
Borrower Displays the name of the borrower for the finance.
Finance Start Date Displays the start date of the finance.
Finance Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed.
Total O/S Amount Displays the total outstanding amount of the finance.
Finance/Payment Status Click the Info icon to view the status of the finance/payment.
Processing Status Displays the current processing status of the finance.

4. Click the checkbox to select the required finance transaction(s) for which reversal needs to
be initiated.
• Click the hyperlink in the Finance Reference Number column to view more details on
the finance.
5. Click Submit to initiate reversal for the selected finance transactions.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction reversal process.
A transaction reversal task is created in the system based on the associated system,
product, or program parameters.

5-4
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

5.2 Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

This topic describes the steps to process the disbursement transaction reversal record.
When a reversal for disbursement transaction is initiated, a disbursement reversal task is
created in the system based on the associated system parameters.

Note:
Only authorized users can process and authorize the disbursement reversal tasks.

The disbursement reversal tasks are segregated into the following data segments:
• Basic Info
• Pre-Shipment Liquidation
• Party
• Limits
• Interest
• Charges
• Accounting
• Summary
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Tasks.
2. Under Tasks, click Finance. Under Finance, click Free Tasks.
The Finance - Free Tasks screen displays.

Figure 5-3 Finance - Free Tasks

3. Perform any of the below action from the Free Tasks screen.
• Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required disbursement reversal tasks to
process.

5-5
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

• Select the checkbox of the required tasks and click Acquire button above the grid to
acquire multiple tasks. Once you acquire a task, it is moved to the My Tasks list. You
can then navigate to My Tasks screen and click Edit link beside the required
disbursement reversal tasks to process.

Note:
The following information is displayed at the top of the disbursement reversal
tasks screen for each data segment.
• The reference number, the stage, and the operation name of the transaction
acquired for processing.
• Click Remarks button to add any comments about the transaction .
• Click Documents button to upload any new documents or view the uploaded
documents relevant to the transaction.

Basic Info
4. Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required disbursement reversal tasks.
The Basic Info screen displays.

Figure 5-4 Disbursement Reversal - Basic Info

5. Specify the fields on Basic Info screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

5-6
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-3 Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, this field displays
the current business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. It is lesser than the maximum tenor
and greater than the minimum tenor as defined in product/program
and spoke parameter.
The tenor of the finance gets defaulted basis start date and maturity
date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days, post maturity, within which the finance
can be repaid without incurring penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new maturity date post the initial finance maturity date.
By default, the date displayed is Maturity Date + Grace Days.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Applicable Finance % is displayed in this field. The Finance amount
and consequently the finance percentage can be changed in the
initiation stage.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance amount.
Finance Amount Finance Amount finalized and captured during the initiation stage is
displayed. The field displays the Finance (%) value of the Total
Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Preferred Disbursement Displays the preferred mode of finance disbursement.
Mode The options are:
• Account Transfer
• Cheque
• EFT
Adhoc Limits Utilized This checkbox is auto-selected if adhoc limits are being utilized in the
transaction.
Skip Pre-Shipment This field is displayed only if any outstanding pre-shipment finance is
Liquidation identified for the respective parties of the post-shipment finance.
Channel Displays the source application from which the transaction is
initiated.
Reversal Amount Displays the disbursement amount that is reversed.
Reversal Date Displays the date when the disbursement transaction is reversed.

6. Perform any of the below actions from the Basic Info screen.

5-7
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

• Click Next to go to the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Pre-Shipment Liquidation
Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen displays the details of the pre-shipment finances that are
liquidated on reversal of a post-shipment disbursement. This tab is displayed only if there are
any settled pre-shipment finances identified for the buyer-seller combination.
7. Click Next on the Basic Info tab.
The Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen displays.

Figure 5-5 Disbursement Reversal - Pre-Shipment Liquidation

8. Specify the fields on Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

5-8
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-4 Pre-Shipment Liquidation - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Reversal Amount Displays the disbursement amount that is reversed.
Reversal Date Displays the date when the disbursement transaction is reversed.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Disbursement Date Displays the date of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
Liquidated Pre-Shipment The list of pre-shipment finances that are liquidated are
Finances displayed in this section.
Finance Reference Displays the reference number of the pre-shipment finance settled.
Number Click the hyperlink data to view more details of the finance.
Finance Status Displays the current status of the pre-shipment finance.
Finance Due Date Displays the maturity date of the pre-shipment finance.
Finance Outstanding Displays the total outstanding amount of the pre-shipment finance.
Finance Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the total outstanding of the
(Invoice Finance pre-shipment finance in invoice currency.
Currency)
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between invoice finance currency and
PO finance currency.
Finance Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the total outstanding of the
(Purchase Order Finance pre-shipment finance in purchase order currency.
Currency)
Principal Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding principal
of the pre-shipment finance.
Principal Reversed Displays the reversed principal amount of the pre-shipment finance.
Interest Appropriated Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding interest of
the pre-shipment finance.

5-9
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-4 (Cont.) Pre-Shipment Liquidation - Field Description

Field Name Description

Interest Reversed Displays the reversed interest amount of the pre-shipment finance.
Penalty On Interest Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding penalty on
Appropriated interest of the pre-shipment finance.
Penalty On Interest Displays the reversed penalty on interest amount of the pre-shipment
Reversed finance.
Penalty On Principal Displays the amount appropriated against the outstanding penalty on
Appropriated principal of the pre-shipment finance.
Penalty On Principal Displays the reversed penalty on principal amount of the pre-
Reversed shipment finance.

9. Perform any of the below actions from the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.
• Click Next to go to the Party screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Basic Info screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
• The following options are displayed only if there are any errors in reversing the pre-
shipment settlements and the transaction moves to PrePostConversionException
stage.
– Click Retry to reverse the pre-shipment settlement.
– Click Approve to approve the transaction once the errors are resolved.
Party
10. Click Next on the Pre-Shipment Liquidation tab.

The Party screen displays.

5-10
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Figure 5-6 Disbursement Reversal - Party

11. Specify the fields on Party screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-5 Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.

5-11
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-5 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Party Details Parties with specific roles in the program can be added in this
section.
Party Details Select the party role to be added.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
• Import Factor
• Export Factor
• Insurance
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
Search Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Division Click the search icon to select the division code of the party.
Address Specify the address of the selected party.
Add New Row Click this button to add the selected party to the grid.
Party Role Displays the role of the party.
Party Id Displays the unique ID of the party.
Party Name Displays the name of the party
Address Displays the address of the party.
Division Code Displays the division code of the party.
Division Name Displays the division name of the party.
Action Click Options icon to view the actions that can be taken on the party
record.

12. Perform the following steps to take action on the parties in the grid:

• Click Add New Row to add more parties.

• Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Actions column and
then click Delete to remove the party.
13. Perform any of the below actions from the Party screen.

• Click Next to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

5-12
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

• Click Back to go to the Pre-Shipment Liquidation screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Limits
14. Click Next on the Party tab.

The Limits screen displays.

Figure 5-7 Disbursement Reversal - Limits

15. Specify the fields on Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-6 Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.

5-13
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-6 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Limit Details Limit details of the entity that is being financed is displayed in
this section.
Limit Type Displays a label of the entity and the linked limit type.
Entity Displays the entity – Anchor / Product / Program / Spoke and so on.
Entity Name Displays the name of the entity.
Breach Type Displays any limit breach exception that has occurred with respect to
the entity. (Limits Frozen, Amount Breach, Limits Expired).
Processing Outcome Displays the action that will be taken on the limit as a result of
disbursement.
• Utilize - If the limit is being booked.
• Stop - If in case of an exception, the transaction should be
blocked and not allowed to be processed further.
• Skip - If in case of an exception, the transaction is to be
processed without limit booking.
This behavior is driven by the credit limit mapping as configured in
product parameters.
Amount Displays the finance amount.
Line Ccy Displays the currency of the limit line.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the finance amount currency
and the line currency.
Amount (In line CCY) Displays the finance amount in line currency.
Sanctioned Amount Displays the limit amount assigned to the entity.
Total Blocked Amount Displays the total amount that has been blocked for finances that are
currently being processed, with respect to the entity.
Total Utilized Amount Displays the limit amount that has already been utilized.
Available Amount Displays the limit amount available for financing.
Line Id Displays the unique ID of the limit line of the entity.
Action Displays the action RELEASE, as the blocked limits are released as
part of disbursement reversal.

5-14
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-6 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Actual Available Limits Displays the actual limit available to the entity for financing.

16. Perform any of the below actions from the Limits screen.

• Click Next to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Party screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Interest
17. Click Next on the Limits tab.

The Interest screen displays.

5-15
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Figure 5-8 Disbursement Reversal - Interest

18. Specify the fields on Interest screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-7 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.

5-16
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-7 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is
applicable.
Interest and Penalty Interest, Penalty on Principal, and Penalty on Interest details of
Amount Details the finance is displayed in this section.
Interest Amount Displays the interest amount that has been calculated.
Penalty on Principal Displays the penalty on the outstanding principal that has been
calculated, if any.
Penalty on Interest Displays the penalty on the outstanding interest that has been
calculated, if any.
Interest Details Interest details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional interest details.
• Interest Additional Details - Displays additional information
related to the interest.
• Interest Payment Schedule - Displays the details of periodic
interest dues for monthly rest transactions.

5-17
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-7 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on principal.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on interest.

19. Perform any of the below actions from the Interest screen.

• Click Next to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.

5-18
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Charges
20. Click Next on the Interest tab.

The Charges screen displays.

Figure 5-9 Disbursement Reversal - Charges

21. Specify the fields on Charges screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-8 Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount

5-19
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-8 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Charge Details Charge details of the finance is displayed in this section.

Charge Displays the charge code.
Apply Click this button to reverse the amount charged for the disbursement.
Checkbox Select the checkbox against the charges to reverse the charge
amount.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the disbursement transaction is viewed from
checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.
Reversal Charge Charge details of the disbursement reversal is displayed in this
section.
Charge Displays the charge code.

5-20
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-8 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
This field becomes editable if Modify Pricing radio button is selected
in the Actions column.
Click the search icon in the Charge Pricing Rule column. The
Charge Pricing Rule pop-up screen displays.
a. Enter complete or partial value in the Charge Pricing Id or
Charge Pricing Description fields .
b. Click Fetch. The relevant pricing rule(s) displays.
c. Select the pricing rule to be applied.

Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.
Actions Displays the below radio buttons.
• Waive – Click the button to waive the charge amount. If
selected, the charge amount field defaults to zero.
• Override – Click the button to modify the existing charge
amount . For Charge Collection Type selected as Periodic, the
override charge amount entered will be proportionately adjusted
across the schedule.
• Modify Pricing – Click the button to modify the charge pricing
rule. Charge Pricing Rule field becomes editable to select a
different pricing rule.
• Reset – Click the button to reset to the original calculation of
charges and charge pricing rule.
These fields are enabled or disabled as per the charge maintenance
parameters set in the Charge Decisioning and the Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the disbursement reversal transaction is
viewed from checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.

22. Click the link in the Details column to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.

5-21
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Figure 5-10 Charge Details

Figure 5-11 Schedule of Charges

23. Perform any of the below actions from the Charges screen.

• Click Next to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

5-22
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Accounting
24. Click Next on the Charges tab.

The Accounting screen displays.

Figure 5-12 Disbursement Reversal - Accounting

25. Specify the fields on Accounting screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

5-23
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-9 Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the disbursement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
being financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that is being financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO being financed.
Amount
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount to be
financed.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the total receivable amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the disbursement.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.

This field is displayed only if Pre-Shipment Liquidation is

applicable.

Accounting Details Accounting details of the finance is displayed in this section.

Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.
Reversal Accounting Accounting entries maintained for the disbursement reversal of
Entry the finance is displayed in this section.
Exact Reversal Entry Switch this toggle ON to reverse the original accounting entries of the
disbursement transaction. By default, this switch is OFF.

5-24
 Chapter 5
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task

Table 5-9 (Cont.) Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.

26. Perform any of the below actions from the Accounting screen.

• Click Next to go to the Summary screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Summary
The Summary screen shows a snapshot of the complete disbursement reversal transaction
along with finance amount, interest applicable, terms, and so on. A tile is displayed for each
data segment.
27. Click Next on the Accounting tab.

The Summary screen displays.

5-25
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Figure 5-13 Disbursement Reversal - Summary

28. Review the details of the disbursement transaction and perform any of the following action
from the Summary screen.
• Click each tile to view the detailed information of the data segments.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
disbursement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system. Once approved, the finance gets
reversed in the core lending system, which in-turn will return the
disbursement reversed status to Supply Chain Finance system.

• Click Back to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Reject to purge the disbursement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

5.3 Processing Settlement Reversal Task

This topic describes the steps to process the settlement transaction reversal record.
When a reversal for settlement transaction is initiated, a settlement reversal task is created in
the system based on the associated system parameters.

Note:
Only authorized users can process and authorize the settlement reversal tasks.

The settlement reversal tasks are segregated into the following data segments:
• Basic Info

5-26
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

• Party
• Limits
• Interest
• Charges
• Accounting
• Summary
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Tasks.
2. Under Tasks, click Finance. Under Finance, click Free Tasks.
The Finance - Free Tasks screen displays.

Figure 5-14 Finance - Free Tasks

3. Perform any of the below action from the Free Tasks screen.
• Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required settlement reversal tasks to
process.
• Select the checkbox of the required tasks and click Acquire button above the grid to
acquire multiple tasks. Once you acquire a task, it is moved to the My Tasks list. You
can then navigate to My Tasks screen and click Edit link beside the required
settlement reversal tasks to process.

Note:
The following information is displayed at the top of the settlement reversal tasks
screen for each data segment.
• The reference number, the stage, and the operation name of the transaction
acquired for processing.
• Click Remarks button to add any comments about the transaction .
• Click Documents button to upload any new documents or view the uploaded
documents relevant to the transaction.

Basic Info

5-27
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

4. Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required settlement tasks.
The Basic Info screen displays.

Figure 5-15 Settlement Reversal - Basic Info

5. Specify the fields on Basic Info screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-10 Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Basic Info Basic information of the settlement transaction being reversed
is displayed in this section.

5-28
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-10 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance amount.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Channel Displays the source application from which the transaction is
initiated.
Settlement Reversal Settlement Reversal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Settlement Ref No Displays the reference number of the settlement.
Payment Mode Displays the mode of payment of the settlement amount.
Payment Amount Displays the total amount being paid by the payment party.
Payment Party Displays the name of the party making the payment.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the date on which the settlement process was initiated.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the finance currency and the
settlement currency.
Appropriated Payment Displays the amount that is appropriated for the settlement of the
Amount selected finances.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Settlement Reversal Displays the settlement amount that is reversed.
Amount
Reversal Date Displays the date when the settlement transaction is reversed.
Post-Shipment This section is displayed only when post-shipment
Disbursement Details disbursement proceeds are used to liquidate a pre-shipment
finance.

5-29
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-10 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Finance Reference Displays the reference number of the post-shipment finance. Click
Number the hyperlink in the Finance Reference Number field to view more
details on the finance
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing of the settlement.
Date
Finance Start Date Displays the start date of the finance.
Finance Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount financed.
Pre-Shipment Settlement Displays the total pre-shipment settlement amount appropriated
Amount against the relevant outstanding pre-shipment finances.
Net Disbursed Amount Displays the disbursed amount from post-shipment finance i.e., Net
Disbursed Amount = Post-Shipment Finance Amount – Pre-Shipment
Settlement Amount.
Outstanding and Outstanding and Appropriation details of the settled finance
Appropriation details settled is displayed in this section.
O/S as on Date Outstanding details of the finance on the current date is
displayed in this section.
Principal O/S Displays the outstanding principal amount as on the current date.
Interest O/S Displays the outstanding interest as on the current date.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due as on the current date.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding principal as on the current
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding interest as on the current
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Total O/S Displays the total outstanding amount as on current date.
O/S as on Value/ Outstanding details of the finance on the settlement date is
Settlement Date displayed in this section.
Principal O/S Displays the outstanding principal as on the settlement date.
Interest O/S Displays the outstanding interest as on the settlement date.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due as on the settlement date.
A hyperlink for the Interest Due field is enabled only if any interest is
due. Click the hyperlink to open the pop-up screen to view the date-
wise calculation details for interest due.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding principal as on the
settlement date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up screen to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays any penalty on the outstanding interest as on the settlement
date.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.

5-30
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-10 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Total O/S Displays the total outstanding amount as on the settlement date.
Appropriation Details as Appropriation details of the payment towards the finance on the
on Settlement Value Date settlement value date is displayed in this section.
Liquidation Order Displays the actual order in which the components are liquidated.
• I - Interest due Date
• E - Penalty on Interest Start Date
• O - Penalty on Principal Start Date
• F - Finances (Outstanding Finances)
• D - Overdue Finance (Delinquent)
Appropriation Sequence Displays the appropriation sequence of settlement amount.
• P - Principal Amount
• I - Interest amount
• O - Penalty on Principal
• E - Penalty on Interest
Payment Towards Displays the amount settled against the principal of the finance.
Principal By default, the value entered as the payment amount in the
Settlement Details section is auto-populated.
Payment Towards Interest Displays the amount settled against the interest of the finance.
Payment Towards Penalty Displays the amount settled against the penalty on principal of the
on Principal finance.
Payment Towards Penalty Displays the amount settled against the penalty on interest of the
on Interest finance.
Interest Refund Displays any interest amount refunded.
O/S Post Settlement Outstanding details of the finance post settlement reversal on
Reversal as on Settlement the settlement value date is displayed in this section.
Value Date
Principal O/S Displays the principal amount that will be outstanding, post
settlement reversal.
Interest O/S Displays the interest amount that will be outstanding, post settlement
reversal.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due amount that will be outstanding,
post settlement reversal.
A hyperlink for the Interest Due field is enabled only if any interest is
due. Click the hyperlink to open the pop-up screen to view the date-
wise calculation details for interest due.
Penalty on Principal O/S Displays the penalty on principal amount that will be outstanding,
post settlement reversal.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Principal O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on principal O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.
Penalty on Interest O/S Displays the penalty on interest that will be outstanding, post
settlement reversal.
A hyperlink for the Penalty on Interest O/S field is enabled only if
any penalty on interest O/S is applicable. Click the hyperlink to open
the pop-up window to view the breakup.
Total O/S Displays the total amount that will be outstanding, post settlement
reversal.

6. Perform any of the below actions from the Basic Info screen.
• Click Next to go to the Party screen.

5-31
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Party
7. Click Next on the Basic Info tab.
The Party screen displays.

Figure 5-16 Settlement Reversal - Party

8. Specify the fields on Party screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-11 Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.

5-32
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-11 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Party Details Parties with specific roles in the program can be added in this
section.
Party Details Select the party role to be added.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
• Import Factor
• Export Factor
• Insurance
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
Search Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Division Click the search icon to select the division code of the party.
Address Specify the address of the selected party.
Add New Row Click this button to add the selected party to the grid.
Party Role Displays the role of the party.
Party Id Displays the unique ID of the party.
Party Name Displays the name of the party
Address Displays the address of the party.
Division Code Displays the division code of the party.
Division Name Displays the division name of the party.
Action Click Options icon to view the actions that can be taken on the party
record.

9. Perform the following steps to take action on the parties in the grid:
• Click Add New Row to add more parties.
• Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Actions column and
then click Delete to remove the party.
10. Perform any of the below actions from the Party screen.

• Click Next to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.
• Click Back to go to the Basic Info screen.
• Click Reject to purge the settlement transaction reversal.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

5-33
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Limits
11. Click Next on the Party tab.

The Limits screen displays.

Figure 5-17 Settlement Reversal - Limits

12. Specify the fields on Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-12 Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Limit Details Limit details of the entity for which the settlement reversed is
displayed in this section.
Limit Type Displays a label of the entity and the linked limit type.
Entity Displays the entity – Anchor / Product / Program / Spoke and so on.

5-34
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-12 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Entity Name Displays the name of the entity.
Breach Type Displays any limit breach exception that has occurred with respect to
the entity. (Limits Frozen, Amount Breach, Limits Expired).
Processing Outcome Displays the action that will be taken on the limit as a result of
settlement.
• Utilize - If the limit is being booked.
• Stop - If in case of an exception, the transaction should be
blocked and not allowed to be processed further.
• Skip - If in case of an exception, the transaction is to be
processed without limit booking.
This behavior is driven by the credit limit mapping as configured in
product parameters.
Amount Displays the settlement amount with respect to the entity.
Line Ccy Displays the currency of the limit line.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the settlement amount currency
and the line currency.
Amount (In line CCY) Displays the settlement amount in line currency.
Sanctioned Amount Displays the limit amount assigned to the entity, in line currency.
Total Blocked Amount Displays the total amount that has been blocked for finances that are
currently being processed, with respect to the entity.
Total Utilized Amount Displays the limit amount that has already been utilized.
Available Amount Displays the limit amount available to the entity for financing.
Line Id Displays the unique ID of the limit line of the entity.
Action Displays the action BLOCK, as the released limits are blocked again
as part of settlement reversal.
Actual Available Limits Displays the actual limit available to the entity for financing.

13. Perform any of the below actions from the Limits screen.

• Click Next to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Party screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Interest
14. Click Next on the Limits tab.

The Interest screen displays.

5-35
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Figure 5-18 Settlement Reversal - Interest

15. Specify the fields on Interest screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-13 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.

5-36
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-13 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Interest and Penalty Interest, Penalty on Principal, and Penalty on Interest details of
Amount Details the finance is displayed in this section.
Interest Amount Displays the interest amount that has been calculated.
Penalty on Principal Displays the penalty on the outstanding principal that has been
calculated, if any.
Penalty on Interest Displays the penalty on the outstanding interest that has been
calculated, if any.
Interest Details Interest details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional interest details.
• Interest Additional Details - Displays additional information
related to the interest.
• Interest Payment Schedule - Displays the details of periodic
interest dues for monthly rest transactions.
Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on principal.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.

5-37
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-13 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on interest.

16. Perform any of the below actions from the Interest screen.

• Click Next to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Charges
17. Click Next on the Interest tab.

The Charges screen displays.

5-38
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Figure 5-19 Settlement Reversal - Charges

18. Specify the fields on Charges screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 5-14 Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
Date business date.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Charge Details Charge details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Charge Displays the charge code.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.

5-39
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-14 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the settlement transaction is viewed from
checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.
Reversal Charge Charge details of the settlement reversal is displayed in this
section.
Charge Displays the charge code.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the settlement reversal transaction is
viewed from checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.

19. Click the link in the Details column to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.

5-40
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Figure 5-20 Charge Details

Figure 5-21 Schedule of Charges

20. Perform any of the below actions from the Charges screen.

• Click Next to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

5-41
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Accounting
21. Click Next on the Charges tab.

The Accounting screen displays.

Figure 5-22 Settlement Reversal - Accounting

22. Specify the fields on Accounting screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

5-42
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Table 5-15 Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch code where the settlement reversal is being
processed. By default, the logged-in user’s branch code is displayed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view a list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Settlement Processing Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
Date business date.
Settlement Processing Displays the date of processing the settlement.
Date
Settlement / Value Date Displays the actual date of settlement.
Settlement Amount Displays the amount being settled.
Accounting Details Accounting details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.
Reversal Accounting Accounting entries maintained for the settlement reversal of the
Entry finance is displayed in this section.
Exact Reversal Entry Switch this toggle ON to reverse the original accounting entries of the
settlement transaction. By default, this switch is OFF.
Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the settlement mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.

23. Perform any of the below actions from the Accounting screen.

• Click Next to go to the Summary screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

5-43
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Summary
The Summary tab shows a snapshot of the complete settlement reversal transaction along with
finance amount, interest applicable, terms, and so on. A tile is displayed for each data
segment.
24. Click Next on the Accounting tab.

The Summary screen displays.

Figure 5-23 Settlement Reversal - Summary

25. Review the details of the settlement reversal transaction and perform any of the following
action from the Summary screen.
• Click each tile to view the detailed information of the data segments.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
settlement reversal.

Note:
If the Reversal Auth Required toggle is enabled in the system parameters,
an approval task is created in the system. Once approved, the finance gets
reversed in the core lending system, which in-turn will return the settlement
reversed status to Supply Chain Finance system.

• Click Back to go to the Accounting screen.

5-44
 Chapter 5
Processing Settlement Reversal Task

• Click Reject to purge the settlement reversal transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

5-45
6
Finance Amendment
This topic describes the steps to initiate amendment and processing the amendment task.
Finance Amendment functionality enables the banks to modify the tenor, and reprice the
interest of the outstanding finances/loans for corporate customers in the supply chain finance
system. Based on your role, you can initiate the amendment of a loan on behalf of the
corporate customer. The amendment request can be initiated from the Finance Amendment
screen.
The Finance Amendment process involves the below steps:
• Initiate Finance Amendment
This topic describes the systematic instruction to initiate finance amendment to modify the
outstanding finances/loans for corporate customers.
• Processing Amendment Task
This topic describes the steps to process the amendment record.

6.1 Initiate Finance Amendment

This topic describes the systematic instruction to initiate finance amendment to modify the
outstanding finances/loans for corporate customers.
The user can manually initiate an amendment transaction in the Finance Amendment screen.
You can search and select the finances to amend, and initiate the amendment process.
Multiple finances can be selected for amendment. For each finance reference number you
select, an amendment transaction is created under Free Tasks.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Finance Amendment.
The Finance Amendment screen displays.

Figure 6-1 Finance Amendment - Finance Search/Selection

2. Specify the fields on Finance Search/Selection section to search for the finances against
which amendment needs to be initiated.

6-1
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-1 Finance Search/Selection - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Select the account branch.
Finance Reference No Specify the reference number to search for the finance.
Finance Status Select the current status of the finance.
The available options are:
• Disbursed
• Disbursement Reversed
• Partial Settled
Product Select the product for which the finance is processed.
Program Click the search icon to select the program for which the finance is
processed.
Supplier Click the search icon to select the supplier party of the finance.
Buyer Click the search icon to select the buyer party of the finance.
Borrower Click the search icon to select the borrower.
Date Reference Basis Select the value to specify the reference for date criteria.
The available options are:
• Finance Date
• Finance Maturity Date
• Processing Date
Date Range Click the calendar icons and select the required starting and ending
ranges for the date to search for the finance.

This field is enabled only if any value is selected in the Date

Reference Basis field.

Delinquency Status Select the current delinquency status of the finance.

The available options are:
• Normal
• Doubtful
• Past Due Obligation
• Watch Status
• Non-Accrual Basis
• Pending Closure Commitments
• Loss
• Write Off
Currency Select the currency of the finance to search for.
Finance Amount From Specify the start of the amount-range within which the finance needs
to be searched.
Finance Amount To Specify the end of the amount-range within which the finance needs
to be searched.

3. Click Search after you specify the required details in the Finance Search/Selection
section.

6-2
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

The List of Finances section displays with the list of finances in the grid.

Figure 6-2 List of Finances

Table 6-2 List of Finances - Field Description

Field Name Description

Bulk Amendment Switch the toggle ON to initiate amendment for multiple finances
together.
Finance Reference No Displays the reference number of the finance.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Supplier Displays the name of the supplier for the finance.
Buyer Displays the name of the buyer for the finance.
Finance Start Date Displays the start date of the finance.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance.
Finance Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed.
O/S Amount Displays the total outstanding amount of the finance.
View Amendments Click the hyperlink to view the modified details of the finance
amendment transaction.
This field column appears only if any finance(s) is modified for
amendment.
Amendment section This field displays the following fields to modify the finance
details to initiate amendment.
Maturity Date Enter the new maturity date of the finance. This date has to be
greater than the current business date.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
This field is displayed only if a single finance is selected.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
This field is displayed only if a single finance is selected.

6-3
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

Table 6-2 (Cont.) List of Finances - Field Description

Field Name Description

Total Finances Displays the total number of the finance(s) amended.
Total Finance Amount Displays the total finance amount of the finance(s) amended.

4. Click the checkbox to select the required finance(s) for which amendment needs to be
initiated. Switch the Bulk Amendment toggle ON to amend the maturity date for multiple
finances.

Note:
Bulk Amendment can be initiated only to modify the tenor of the finances. Interest
tab will not get displayed if the Bulk Amendment toggle is enabled.

• Click the hyperlink in the Finance Reference Number column to view more details on
the finance. The Finance Details pop-up screen displays.

Figure 6-3 Finance Details

5. The details of the selected finance gets auto-populated in the Basic Information tab to
modify the tenor of the finance and/or modify the value date for the interest repricing.

Figure 6-4 Finance Amendment - Basic Information

Table 6-3 Basic Information - Field Description

Field Name Description

Maturity Date Specify the new maturity date of the finance. This date has to be
greater than the current business date.

6-4
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

Table 6-3 (Cont.) Basic Information - Field Description

Field Name Description

Value Date Specify the new value date for the interest rate to be applied. By
default, this field displays the current business date. The value date
should be lesser than or equal to the current business date.
This field is displayed only if a single finance is selected.

Note:
This date can be updated only till the value date of the
immediate previous transaction.

Note:
Value dated amendment is not allowed for Rate Type
Change of compound interest loans.

Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
This field is displayed only if a single finance is selected.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
This field is displayed only if a single finance is selected.
Total Finances Displays the total number of the finance(s) amended.
Total Finance Amount Displays the total finance amount of the finance(s) amended.

6. Click the Interest tab to modify the pricing rate of the interest or penalty components.
The details of the selected finance gets auto-populated in the Interest tab.

6-5
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

Figure 6-5 Finance Amendment - Interest

Table 6-4 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Interest Details Interest details of the selected finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Click the search icon and select the pricing rule to be applied for the
interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
If the Rate Pricing Rule is changed, then this fields displays NA.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the selected finance is displayed
Details in this section.

6-6
 Chapter 6
Initiate Finance Amendment

Table 6-4 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Rate Pricing Rule Click the search icon and select the pricing rule to be applied for the
interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
If the Rate Pricing Rule is changed, then this fields displays NA.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the selected finance is displayed in
this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Click the search icon and select the pricing rule to be applied for the
interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
If the Rate Pricing Rule is changed, then this fields displays NA.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.

7. Modify the Maturity Date, Value Date, and Rate Pricing Rule for the selected finance(s).
8. Click Apply to modify the finances.
• Click Undo to revert the changes.
• Click View Amendment Details hyperlink next to the finance(s) to review the previous
and new values of the finances that are modified.
The View Amendments Details screen displays.

6-7
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Figure 6-6 View Amendment Details - Basic Information

Figure 6-7 View Amendment Details - Interest

9. Click Submit to initiate amendment against the selected finances.

• Click Cancel to cancel the amendment initiation process.
An amendment task is created in the system based on the associated program/product
parameters.

6.2 Processing Amendment Task

This topic describes the steps to process the amendment record.
When a finance amendment is initiated, an amendment task is created in the system based on
the associated program/product parameters.

6-8
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Note:
Only authorized users can process and authorize the amendment tasks.

The amendment tasks are segregated into the following data segments:
• Basic Info
• Party
• Interest
• Charges
• Accounting
• Amendment
• Limits
• Summary
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Tasks.
2. Under Tasks, click Finance. Under Finance, click Free Tasks.
The Finance - Free Tasks screen displays.

Figure 6-8 Finance - Free Tasks

3. Perform any of the below action from the Free Tasks screen.
• Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required amendment tasks to process.
• Select the checkbox of the required tasks and click Acquire button above the grid to
acquire multiple tasks. Once you acquire a task, it is moved to the My Tasks list. You
can then navigate to My Tasks screen and click Edit link beside the required
amendment tasks to process.

6-9
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Note:
The following information is displayed at the top of the amendment tasks screen
for each data segment.
• The reference number, the stage, and the operation name of the transaction
acquired for processing.
• Click Remarks button to add any comments about the transaction .
• Click Documents button to upload any new documents or view the uploaded
documents relevant to the transaction.

Basic Info
4. Click the Acquire and Edit link beside the required amendment tasks.
The Basic Info screen displays.

Figure 6-9 Amendment - Basic Info

5. Specify the fields on Basic Info screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-5 Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.

6-10
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-5 (Cont.) Basic Info - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
View Disbursement Limits Click the link to view the details of the disbursement limits.
This field will not be displayed if there is a limit processing exception.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Channel Displays the source application from which the transaction is
initiated.
Amendment Value Date Displays the new value date by when the updated interest rate gets
applied.
Outstanding Details Outstanding details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Principal Outstanding Displays the outstanding principal amount as on the current date.
Interest Outstanding Displays the outstanding interest as on the current date.
Interest Due Displays the monthly interest due as on the current date.
Penalty on Principal O/s Displays any penalty on the outstanding principal as on the current
date.
Penalty on Interest Displays any penalty on the outstanding interest as on the current
Outstanding date.
Total O/S Displays the total outstanding amount as on current date.

6. Perform any of the below actions from the Basic Info screen.
• Click Next to go to the Party screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

6-11
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Party
7. Click Next on the Basic Info tab.
The Party screen displays.

Figure 6-10 Amendment - Party

8. Specify the fields on Party screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-6 Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.

6-12
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-6 (Cont.) Party - Field Description

Field Name Description

Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Party Details Parties with specific roles in the program can be added in this
section.
Party Details Select the party role to be added.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Supplier
• Import Factor
• Export Factor
• Insurance
• Beneficiary/Counter Party
Search Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Division Click the search icon to select the division code of the party.
Address Specify the address of the selected party.
Add New Row Click this button to add the selected party to the grid.
Party Role Displays the role of the party.
Party Id Displays the unique ID of the party.
Party Name Displays the name of the party
Address Displays the address of the party.
Division Code Displays the division code of the party.
Division Name Displays the division name of the party.
Action Click Options icon to view the actions that can be taken on the party
record.

9. Perform the following steps to take action on the parties in the grid:
• Click Add New Row to add more parties.

6-13
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

• Select the record in the grid and click Options icon under the Actions column and
then click Delete to remove the party.
10. Perform any of the below actions from the Party screen.

• Click Next to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Basic Info screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Interest
11. Click Next on the Party tab.

The Interest screen displays.

Figure 6-11 Amendment - Interest

6-14
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

12. Specify the fields on Interest screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-7 Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Interest and Penalty Interest, Penalty on Principal, and Penalty on Interest details of
Amount Details the finance is displayed in this section.
Interest Amount Displays the interest amount that has been calculated.
Penalty on Principal Displays the penalty on the outstanding principal that has been
calculated, if any.
Penalty on Interest Displays the penalty on the outstanding interest that has been
calculated, if any.
Interest Details Interest details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the unique code associated with the interest rate.

6-15
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-7 (Cont.) Interest - Field Description

Field Name Description

Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Interest Collection Type Displays the type of interest collection, whether rear-ended, or front-
ended.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Interest Rate (%) Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional interest details.
The Interest Additional Details pop-up screen displays the
additional information related to the interest.
Penalty on Principal Penalty on principal details of the finance is displayed in this
Details section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on principal.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on principal.
Penalty on Interest Details Penalty on interest details of the finance is displayed in this
section.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
Applied Filter Criteria Displays the filter criteria applied for the interest rate.
Rate Code Displays the code of the penalty on the penalty on interest.
Rate Type Displays whether the rate is floating or fixed.
Risk Free Rate Displays whether the interest rate applied is risk free.
Schedule Type Displays whether the interest collection schedule is normal or
compounding.
Reset Tenor Displays the tenor for applying the new interest rate, in case of
floating rate type.
Rate (%) Displays the base rate of interest.
Spread Displays the spread or margin rate of interest.
Net Penalty on Principal Displays the total rate of interest. This is the sum of Rate (%) and
Rate (%) Spread.
Additional Details Click this link to view additional details related to penalty on interest.

6-16
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

13. Perform any of the below actions from the Interest screen.
• Click Next to go to the Charges screen.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Party screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Charges
14. Click Next on the Interest tab.

The Charges screen displays.

Figure 6-12 Amendment - Charges

15. Specify the fields on Charges screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-8 Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.

6-17
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-8 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Charge Details Charge details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Charge Displays the charge code.
Charge Pricing Rule Displays the charge pricing rule applicable to the transaction.
This field becomes editable if Modify Pricing radio button is selected
in the Actions column.
Click the search icon in the Charge Pricing Rule column. The
Charge Pricing Rule pop-up screen displays.
a. Enter complete or partial value in the Charge Pricing Id or
Charge Pricing Description fields .
b. Click Fetch. The relevant pricing rule(s) displays.
c. Select the pricing rule to be applied.

Charge Collection Type Displays the type of charge collection applicable to the transaction.
Party Displays the ID of the party that has been charged.
Party Role Displays the role of the party that has been charged.
Charge Amount Displays the amount charged along with the currency.
If the charge is Auto Waived, then the charge amount field defaults
to zero.

6-18
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-8 (Cont.) Charges - Field Description

Field Name Description

Actions Displays the below radio buttons.
• Waive – Click the button to waive the charge amount. If
selected, the charge amount field defaults to zero.
• Override – Click the button to modify the existing charge
amount . For Charge Collection Type selected as Periodic, the
override charge amount entered will be proportionately adjusted
across the schedule.
• Modify Pricing – Click the button to modify the charge pricing
rule. Charge Pricing Rule field becomes editable to select a
different pricing rule.
• Reset – Click the button to reset to the original calculation of
charges and charge pricing rule.
These fields are enabled or disabled as per the charge maintenance
parameters set in the Charge Decisioning and the Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Status Displays the status of the charge and View Original Charges
hyperlink is enabled. Click the link to view the system calculated
charges.
This field is displayed only if Auto Waive is selected in the Charge
Decisioning screen or if the amendment transaction is viewed from
checker login.
Details Click the link to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.
External Pricing Details tab is displayed only if External Pricing
switch is enabled in the Charge Decisioning and Charge
Preferential Pricing screens.
Schedule of Periodic Charges tab is displayed only if the Charge
Collection Type or Charge Calculation Type is selected as
Periodic.

16. Click the link in the Details column to view the charge details, external pricing details, and
schedule of periodic charges.

6-19
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Figure 6-13 Charge Details

Figure 6-14 Schedule of Charges

17. Perform any of the below actions from the Charges screen.

• Click Next to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

6-20
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Interest screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Accounting
18. Click Next on the Charges tab.

The Accounting screen displays.

Figure 6-15 Amendment - Accounting

19. Specify the fields on Accounting screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-9 Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.

6-21
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-9 (Cont.) Accounting - Field Description

Field Name Description

Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Accounting Details Accounting details of the finance is displayed in this section.
Accounting Entry Displays the description of the accounting entry.
Description
Accounting Role Displays the accounting role code associated with the accounting
entry.
Party Displays the name of the party associated with the accounting entry.
Settlement Method Displays the amendment mode of the transaction.
Dr/Cr Displays whether the amount is debited or credited for the accounting
entry.
Account Displays the account number involved in the transaction.
Amount Displays the amount of the transaction.
External Account Details Displays the details of the account if it is an external account.

20. Perform any of the below actions from the Accounting screen.

• Click Next to go to the Amendment screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Charges screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.

6-22
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Amendment
21. Click Next on the Accounting tab.

The Amendment screen displays.

Figure 6-16 Amendment - Amendment

22. Specify the fields on Amendment screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 6-10 Amendment - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.

6-23
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-10 (Cont.) Amendment - Field Description

Field Name Description

Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Amendment Details Existing and the updated values after an amendment
transaction are displayed in this section.
Basic Info The following fields displays the basic information tab of the
modified finance.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Interest The following fields displays the interest details of the modified
finance.
Rate Pricing Rule Displays the old and new pricing rule applied for the interest rate.
(Interest)
Interest Amount Displays the old interest amount and the new interest amount
calculated based on the pricing rule applied.
Rate Pricing Rule (Penalty Displays the old and new pricing rule applied for the interest rate on
on Principal) penalty on principal.
Penalty on Principal Displays the old penalty on principal amount and the new penalty on
Amount principal amount calculated based on the pricing rule applied.
Rate Pricing Rule (Penalty Displays the old and new pricing rule applied for the interest rate on
on Interest) penalty on interest.
Penalty on Interest Displays the old penalty on interest amount and the new penalty on
Amount interest amount calculated based on the pricing rule applied.

23. Perform any of the below actions from the Amendment screen.

• Click Next to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Accounting screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.

6-24
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.

• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Limits
This tab is displayed only if there is a limit freeze or if the limit is expired.
24. Click Next on the Amendment tab.

The Limits screen displays.

Figure 6-17 Amendment - Limits

Note:
When the main limits are being utilized, the Limit Details grid displays details
related to the main limits. You can add columns related to the adhoc limits by
clicking Add/Remove Columns icon, if required. If adhoc limits are being
utilized, then the Limit Details grid displays the Sanctioned Adhoc Amount,
Utilized Adhoc Amount, and Available Adhoc Amount columns. You can add the
columns related to the Main Limits using Add/Remove Columns icon, if
required.

25. Specify the fields on Limits screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

6-25
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-11 Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Displays the branch where the amendment is being processed. By
default, the logged-in user’s branch is displayed.
Program Displays the name of the program that is linked to the receivables
that have been financed.
Product Displays the name of the product associated with the program.
Anchor Displays the name of the anchor party in the program.
Linked Receivables/PO Click the link to view the list of receivables (invoices/debit notes) / PO
that have been financed.
Spoke Displays the name of the counter party in the program.
Start Date Displays the start date of the finance. By default, it is the current
business date.
Tenor Displays the tenor of the finance. The tenor of the finance gets
defaulted basis start date and maturity date.
Maturity Date Displays the maturity date of the finance. Maturity date gets
calculated basis maturity date parameter selected at product level.
Grace Days Displays the number of days past the finance due date, within which
the finance can be settled without penalty.
Past Due Date Displays the new due date post the initial finance maturity date.
Total Receivable/PO Displays the total amount of the receivables/PO that have been
Amount financed.
Finance (%) Displays the percentage of the total receivable/PO amount that have
been financed.
Currency Displays the currency of the finance.
Finance Amount Displays the amount that has been financed. By default, this field
displays the Finance (%) value of the Total Receivable Amount.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the receivable/PO amount
currency and the finance currency.
Processing Date Displays the date of processing of the amendment.
Limit Details Limit details of the entity is displayed in this section.
Limit Type Displays a label of the entity and the linked limit type.
Entity Displays the entity – Anchor / Product / Program / Spoke and so on.
Entity Name Displays the name of the entity.
Breach Type Displays any limit breach exception that has occurred with respect to
the entity. (Limits Frozen, Amount Breach, Limits Expired).
Processing Outcome Displays the action that will be taken on the limit as a result of
settlement.
• Utilize - If the limit is being booked.
• Stop - If in case of an exception, the transaction should be
blocked and not allowed to be processed further.
• Skip - If in case of an exception, the transaction is to be
processed without limit booking.
This behavior is driven by the credit limit mapping as configured in
product parameters.
Amount Displays the finance amount with respect to the entity.
Line Ccy Displays the currency of the limit line.
Exchange Rate Displays the exchange rate between the finance amount currency
and the line currency.
Amount (In line CCY) Displays the finance amount in line currency.

6-26
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Table 6-11 (Cont.) Limits - Field Description

Field Name Description

Sanctioned Amount Displays the limit amount assigned to the entity, in line currency.
Total Blocked Amount Displays the total amount that has been blocked for finances that are
currently being processed, with respect to the entity.
Total Utilized Amount Displays the limit amount that has already been utilized.
Available Amount Displays the limit amount available to the entity for financing.
Line Id Displays the unique ID of the limit line of the entity.
Action Displays the action being taken on the amount being settled.
Actual Available Limits Displays the actual limit available to the entity for financing.

26. Perform any of the below actions from the Limits screen.

• Click Next to go to the Summary screen.

• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.

• Click Back to go to the Amendment screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.
Summary
The Amendment Summary tab shows a snapshot of the complete amendment transaction
along with finance amount, interest applicable, amendment details, terms, and so on. A tile is
displayed for each data segment.
27. Click Next on the Limits tab.

The Summary screen displays.

6-27
 Chapter 6
Processing Amendment Task

Figure 6-18 Amendment - Summary

28. Review the details of the amendment transaction and perform any of the following action
from the Summary screen.
• Click each tile to view the detailed information of the data segments.
• Click Save and Close to save the details and complete the processing stage of the
amendment.

Note:
If the Amendment Auth Required toggle is enabled for the program
associated with the transaction, an approval task is created in the system.
Once approved, the finance gets modified in the core lending system, which
in-turn will return the amendment status to Supply Chain Finance system.

• Click Back to go to the Limits screen.

• Click Reject to purge the amendment transaction.
• Click Hold to move the transaction to the Hold Tasks list.
• Click Cancel to cancel the transaction and return to the Free Tasks screen.

6-28
7
Inquiries
This topic describes the information on the various inquiries supported in the Supply Chain
Finance module.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• Accounting Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for accounting entries based on
various criteria such as File Reference Number, Event, Product, Party, Account Number,
and so on.
• Charge Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for charges based on various
criteria such as Branch, Event, Party, Party Role, Product, Charge Type, and so on.
• Finance Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for finances based on various
criteria such as File Reference Number, Buyer, Supplier, Processing Date, Finance Date,
Finance Amount, and so on.
• Message Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for FCI messages based on
various criteria such as Inward/Outward, Message Type, Buyer, Supplier, Message
Reference Number, Status, Date Range, and so on.
• Structure Limits Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for party limits based on various
criteria such as Limit Type, Entity, Party Id, External Line Id, Date Reference Basis, Date
Range, and so on.
• Structure Limits Txn Inquiry
This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for party limits with respect to a
specific transaction based on various criteria such as Reference Basis, Limit Entity Type,
Limit Type, Limit Event, External Line Id, Date Range, and so on.

7.1 Accounting Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for accounting entries based on
various criteria such as File Reference Number, Event, Product, Party, Account Number, and
so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Accounting Inquiry.
The Accounting Inquiry screen displays.

7-1
 Chapter 7
Accounting Inquiry

Figure 7-1 Accounting Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Accounting Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 7-1 Accounting Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the required branch to proceed further. By default, the branch
of the logged-in user is selected.
Reference Number Specify the reference number.
Event Select the event to search the accounting information for.
The available options are:
• Amendment
• Auto Debit
• Disbursement
• Disbursement Reversal
• Excess Refund
• Interest Refund
• Margin Refund
• Residual Payment Refund
• Settlement
• Settlement Reversal
Product Select the product to inquire the accounting for.
Party Click the search icon to select the party.
Account Number Click the search icon to select the account number.
Accounting Entry Type Select the account entry type.
The available options are:
• Both
• Credit
• Debit
Entry Posting Status Select the status of the accounting entry to inquire for.
The available options are:
• Failure
• Success

7-2
 Chapter 7
Charge Inquiry

Table 7-1 (Cont.) Accounting Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Date Reference Basis Select the basis for a date range search.
The available options are:
• Processing Date
• Value Date
Date Range Click the calendar icons and select the start and end dates of the
date range for the selected Date Reference Basis.

4. Click Search to view the search results.

The Accounting Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

Figure 7-2 Accounting Inquiry - Search Results

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Reference Number column to view more details of the
record.

7.2 Charge Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for charges based on various criteria
such as Branch, Event, Party, Party Role, Product, Charge Type, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Charge Inquiry.
The Charge Inquiry screen displays.

7-3
 Chapter 7
Charge Inquiry

Figure 7-3 Charge Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Charge Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 7-2 Charge Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Branch Select the required branch to proceed further. By default, the branch
of the logged-in user is selected.
Event Select the event to which the charge is applicable.
The available options are:
• Amendment
• Disbursement
• Disbursement Reversal
• Settlement
• Settlement Reversal
Party Click the search icon and select the party that has been charged.
Party Role Select the role of the party.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Import Factor
• Insurance Party
• Supplier
Charge Code Click the search icon and select the charge code to inquire for.
Charge Group Select the group to which the charge code belongs.
The available options are:
• Commission
• Fees
• Rebates
• Tax
Txn Ref No. Specify the reference number or charge reference number to inquire
for.
Charge Type Select the value to specify whether the type of charge is Debit or
Credit.

7-4
 Chapter 7
Charge Inquiry

Table 7-2 (Cont.) Charge Inquiry - Field Description

Field Description
Charge Account Click the Search icon and select the account in which charges takes
effect.
Date Reference Basis Select the type of date range to be applied for search.
• Calculation Date – To list all relevant charges only on the basis
of calculation irrespective of its posting details.
• Posting Date – To list all relevant charges only on the basis of
posting irrespective of when it was calculated.
Date Range Click the Calendar icon and select the start date and end date of the
date range.
Collection Type Select whether the charge has been collected Online or in a
Periodic.
Product Select the product to which the charge is applicable.
Status Select the value to specify the status of charge.
The available options are:
• Auto Waived
• Modified
• Overriden
• Waived
External Pricing Select the value to specify whether external pricing is applied.
The available options are:
• ALL
• Yes
• No

4. Click Search to view the search results.

The Charge Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

Figure 7-4 Charge Inquiry - Search Results

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Txn Ref No. column to view more details of the record.

7-5
 Chapter 7
Finance Inquiry

7.3 Finance Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for finances based on various criteria
such as File Reference Number, Buyer, Supplier, Processing Date, Finance Date, Finance
Amount, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Finance Inquiry.
The Finance Inquiry screen displays.

Figure 7-5 Finance Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Finance Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 7-3 Finance Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Branch Select the required branch to proceed further. By default, the branch
of the logged-in user is selected.
Finance Reference Specify the finance reference number to inquire for.
Number
Finance Status Select the current finance status to inquire for. You can select
multiple status in this field.
The available options are:
• Disbursed
• Disbursement Reversed
• Outstanding
• Overdue
• Partial Settled
• Settled

7-6
 Chapter 7
Message Inquiry

Table 7-3 (Cont.) Finance Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Product Click the search icon to select the product for which the finance is
processed.
Program Click the search icon to select the program for which the finance is
processed.
Supplier Click the search icon to select the supplier party of the finance.
Buyer Click the search icon to select the buyer party of the finance.
Borrower Click the search icon to select the borrower.
Date Reference Basis Select the type of date range to be applied for search.
The available options are:
• Finance Date
• Finance Maturity Date
• Processing Date
Date Range Click the Calendar icon and select the start date and end date of the
date range.
Processing Status Select the current status of the finance to filter the search result. You
can select multiple status in this field.
Delinquency Status Select the delinquency status of the finance to filter the search result.
You can select multiple status in this field.
Amendment Status Select the amendment status of the finance to filter the search result.
Currency Select the currency of the transaction.
Finance Amount From Specify the minimum finance amount to be considered for the
search.
Finance Amount To Specify the maximum finance amount to be considered for the
search.

4. Click Search to view the search results.

The Finance Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

Figure 7-6 Finance Inquiry - Search Results

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Finance Reference Number column to view more
details of the record.

7.4 Message Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for FCI messages based on various
criteria such as Inward/Outward, Message Type, Buyer, Supplier, Message Reference Number,
Status, Date Range, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.

7-7
 Chapter 7
Message Inquiry

1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Message Inquiry.
The Message Inquiry screen displays.

Figure 7-7 Message Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Message Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

Table 7-4 Message Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Inward/Outward Select the value to specify if the message is Inward or Outward.
Message Type Select the value to specify the type of message.
The available options are:
• MESSAGE 09 – Invoices and Credit
• MESSAGE 12 – Indirect Payment
• MESSAGE 14 – Dispute
Buyer Click the search icon to select the buyer party of the message.
Supplier Click the search icon to select the supplier party of the message.
Message Reference Click the search icon to select the message reference number.
Number
Status Select the status of the message to filter the search result.
The available options are:
• Failed
• Not Processed
• Processed
Date Range Click the Calendar icon and select the start date and end date of the
date range.

4. Click Search to view the search results.

The Message Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

7-8
 Chapter 7
Structure Limits Inquiry

Figure 7-8 Message Inquiry - Search Results

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Message Details column to view more details of the
record.

7.5 Structure Limits Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for party limits based on various
criteria such as Limit Type, Entity, Party Id, External Line Id, Date Reference Basis, Date
Range, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Structure Limits Inquiry.
The Structure Limits Inquiry screen displays.

Figure 7-9 Structure Limits Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Structure Limits Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

7-9
 Chapter 7
Structure Limits Inquiry

Table 7-5 Structure Limits Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Limit Type Select the type of limit to search for.
The available options are:
• Advance Payment
• Assignment
• Committed
• Concentrate
• Credit Cover
• Finance
• Invoice
• Main
• Non-Recourse
• Recourse
• Uncommitted
Entity Select the entity type related to the party, whose limits are to be
searched.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Import Factor
• Insurance Party
• Pool
• Product
• Program
• Supplier
An entry field appears to specify the corresponding entity to search
for.
Entity search Click the search icon to select the entity value for which the limits is
processed.
External Line Id Click the search icon to select the line ID from the external system, if
applicable.
Date Reference Basis Select the type of date range to be applied for search.
The available options are:
• Main Limit expiry Date
• Main Limit Sanctioned Date
• Adhoc Limit expiry Date
• Adhoc Limit Sanctioned Date
Date Range Click the Calendar icon and select the start date and end date of the
date range.
Interchangeability Switch the toggle to search for limit structures where
interchangeability is applicable.
Currency Select the limit structure currency.
Root Entity Select the main entity in the limit structure.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Import Factor
• Insurance Party
• Product
• Program
• Supplier

4. Click Search to view the search results.

7-10
 Chapter 7
Structure Limits Txn Inquiry

The Structure Limits Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

Figure 7-10 Structure Limits Inquiry - Search Result

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Entity Name column to view more details of the record.

7.6 Structure Limits Txn Inquiry

This topic describes the systematic instruction to search for party limits with respect to a
specific transaction based on various criteria such as Reference Basis, Limit Entity Type, Limit
Type, Limit Event, External Line Id, Date Range, and so on.
Specify User ID and Password, and login to Home screen.
1. On Home screen, click Supply Chain Finance. Under Supply Chain Finance, click
Inquiry.
2. Under Inquiry, click Structure Limits Txn Inquiry.
The Structure Limits Txn Inquiry screen displays.

Figure 7-11 Structure Limits Txn Inquiry

3. Specify the fields on Structure Limits Txn Inquiry screen.

Note:
The fields marked as Required are mandatory.

For more information on fields, refer to the field description table.

7-11
 Chapter 7
Structure Limits Txn Inquiry

Table 7-6 Structure Limits Txn Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Reference Basis Select the type of reference basis.
The available options are:
• Finance Transaction Ref No
• Invoice No
• Invoice Transaction Ref No
An entry field appears to specify the corresponding reference
number to search for.
Limit Entity Type Select the entity type whose limits are to be searched.
The available options are:
• Buyer
• Import Factor
• Insurance Party
• Pool
• Product
• Program
• Supplier
An entry field appears to specify the corresponding entity to search
for.
Limit Type Select the limit type of the transaction.
The available options are:
• Advance Payment
• Assignment
• Committed
• Concentrate
• Credit Cover
• Finance
• Invoice
• Main
• Non-Recourse
• Recourse
• Uncommitted
Limit Event Select the event for which the limit is applicable.
The available options are:
• Booking
• Release
Transaction Event Select the event of the transaction.
The available options are:
• Assignment
• Auto Debit
• De Reconcile
• Disbursement
• Disbursement Reversal
• Paid
• Dispute
• Re-Assignment
• Dispute Resolution
• Settlement
• Settlement Reversal
• Write Off Dispute

7-12
 Chapter 7
Structure Limits Txn Inquiry

Table 7-6 (Cont.) Structure Limits Txn Inquiry - Field Description

Field Name Description

Date Range Click the Calendar icon and select the start date and end date of the
date range.
External Line Id Click the search icon to select the line ID from the external system, if
applicable.
Currency Select the transaction currency.

4. Click Search to view the search results.

The Structure Limits Txn Inquiry - Search Results screen displays.

Figure 7-12 Structure Limits Txn Inquiry - Search Results

5. Click on the hyperlink data in the Transaction Reference Number column to view more
details of the record.

7-13
8
Batch Jobs
This topic describes the events that are part of Beginning of Day (BOD) and End of Day (EOD)
batch jobs run by the system on daily basis. These activities are run by the system as a batch
job at the beginning and/or end of the day.
This topic contains the following subtopics:
• EOD Batch
• Independent Batch

8.1 EOD Batch

Table 8-1 EOD Batch

Sr. No. Job Name Description

1 Mark Cut Off This job marks the successful completion of EOD and
beginning of the new day.
2 Pre-EOD If there are any finance transactions pending to be
processed, this job will not be completed. For example:
Finance request waiting for approval or with exception. This
job is the first one to get executed as part of EOD batch job.
3 Outstanding Transaction This job does accrual processing, and fetches the updated
interest amount.
4 Modify Contract This job processes repricing for tenor-based spread.
5 Limits Structure Refresh This job is triggered for synchronizing the limits data with
external system.
6 Invoice Limit Approval This job is triggered to approve limits associated with the
Marking invoices. This job is only triggered when assignment is
applicable for products.
7 Stale Invoice This job marks the Invoices as stale based on the configured
settings for each product.
8 Stale PO This job marks the PO's as stale based on the configured
settings for each product.
9 Invoice Acceptance This job changes invoice status as accepted based on the
configurations set in the system.
10 Overdue Invoices This job updates the invoices as overdue.
11 Invoice Charges This job calculates the charges for invoices. Invoices are
grouped into different bunches and all the applicable charges
are applied for a particular bunch. Once the charges are
applied, those are calculated immediately if they are online
charges. In case of periodic charges, charges are calculated
if the charge calculation date matches with the business date
on which EOD is run. Accounting entries are posted once
charges are calculated.

8-1
 Chapter 8
EOD Batch

Table 8-1 (Cont.) EOD Batch

Sr. No. Job Name Description

12 PO Charges This job calculates charges for the purchase orders.
Purchase orders are grouped into different bunches and all
the applicable charges are applied for a particular bunch.
Once the charges are applied, those are calculated
immediately if they are online charges. In case of periodic
charges, charges are calculated if the charge calculation date
matches with the business date on which EOD is run.
Accounting entries posted once charges are calculated.
13 Charges Batch Processing This job calculates & collect periodic charges. All the charges
for all the transactions present in the system are calculated
and account entries are posted if the charge calculation date
matches with the business date on which EOD is run.
14 NPA This job evaluates status of the loans and marks the
delinquency status of the customer along with identification of
Non-Performing Asset (NPA)/Inactive customers.
15 External NPA This job consolidates the customer delinquency status which
is sent from external system with the delinquency status
arrived in the previous event. If external system integration is
not applicable for NPA, this job is not executed.
16 Product Expired This job closes the product as per expiry date configured in
the system.
17 Program Expired This job closes the program as per expiry date configured in
the system.
18 Limit Structure Expired This job closes the limits structure as per expiry date
configured in the system.
19 Alerts This job identifies all the alerts that are to be sent in EOD,
generates, and sends them.
20 Mark EOFI This job is used to identify the end of SCF EOD and initiates
the common core events.
21 Forget Core Accounts This is a common core event which marks forget flag for the
customer accounts as per expiry date.
22 Forget Core Customers This is a common core event which marks forget flag for the
customer as per expiry date.
23 Change Date Job This job flips the business date to the next working date.
24 Release Cut Off This job designates the end of common core EOD.
25 Mark TI This job prepares for the next day transactions.
26 FCI Message Job This job finds out the eligible FCI messages which have not
been sent and creates an FCI message for them and sends
them via a configurable workflow.

Note:
Refer the Branch EOD section in Oracle Banking Common Core User Guide to
configure, invoke, and view the EOD batch jobs.

8-2
 Chapter 8
Independent Batch

Note:
Events marked with * are executed always.

Note:
Before executing any EOD batch, it is recommended to take a backup of the
database.

Note:
During the execution of EOD batch jobs, there is a possibility of occurrence of
technical or functional errors. These errors are captured and displayed on the UI
itself, enabling the user to rectify them.

8.2 Independent Batch

Table 8-2 Independent Batch

S No Event Name Description

1 Auto-Reconciliation This job reconciles transactions for invoice, debit note, and
finance, with payment/credit note based on configured auto-
recon rules.
2 Future Dated Disbursement This job processes transactions with future dated
Processing disbursements.
3 Auto Debit Finance This job processes auto debits for finance transactions as per
configurations set in the system.
4 Auto Debit Invoice This job processes auto debits for invoice transactions as per
configurations set in the system.

Note:
Refer the Task Management section in Tasks User Guide to create, view, configure,
trigger, and view status of the tasks.

8-3
9
Process Codes
This topic describes the information on the manual stages along with the functional activity
codes.
The following table represents the manual stages in Finance workflow along with the functional
activity codes which can be used for mapping in role activity screen under Security
Management System menu.

Table 9-1

Stage Functional Activity Code Description

Limit Processing LimitProcessingException This is a stage before authorization and transaction
Exception falls in this stage when maintenance of limits is not
done properly.
Credit Approval CreditApprovalException This is a stage before authorization and transaction
Exception falls in this stage when exception handling behavior
has been maintained as STOP in the Product
Parameters screen for limit amount and limit expiry
breach.
Create Adhoc CreateAdhocLimitsTransactio This is a stage before authorization and transaction
Limits Transaction nException falls in this stage if there is a technical error while
Exception identifying Adhoc limits applicability in transaction.
Initiate Workflow for InitiateWorkflowForAdhocLimi This is a stage before authorization and transaction
Adhoc Limit Txn tTxnException falls in this stage if there is a technical error due to
Exception which a transaction for Adhoc limits is not initiated
in the system.
Auto Finance AUTOFIN_EXCEPTION This is a stage before authorization and after limit
Exception is blocked. Transaction falls in this stage when auto
processing is enabled and it fails due to financing
validations being done as per finance parameters
maintained in Product/Program/Interest/
Accounting/Charges.
Processing PROCESSING This is a stage before authorization and after limit
is blocked. Transaction falls in this stage when
auto-processing is disabled in Program/Product
parameters.
Authorization AUTHORIZATION This is authorization step wherein user can either
Approve/Reject the record. Transaction falls in this
stage when auto-authorization is disabled in
Product/Program parameters.
Loan Integration OBCL_EXCEPTION This stage is after authorization and transaction
Exception falls in this stage when integration with lending
product (OBCL) to create contracts or make
payment fails.
Accounting Entries ACC_ENTRIES_EXCEPTION This stage is after authorization and transaction
Post Exception falls in this stage when accounting entries posting
integration is configured as ‘Yes’ in system
parameters with another product and posting fails.

9-1
 Chapter 9

Table 9-1 (Cont.)

Stage Functional Activity Code Description

Account Posting ACCPOSTING_RESPONSE_ This stage is after authorization and transaction
Response Awaited AWAITED falls in this stage if accounting entries posting
(Not be mapped on screen) integration is configured as ‘Yes’ in system
parameters with another product and the mode of
integration is asynchronous and transaction is
waiting for response.
External Payment EXTERNAL_PAYMENT_EXC This stage is after authorization and transaction
Exception EPTION falls in this stage when external payment
integration is required as per payment mode in
transaction and external payment system
integration fails.
Outgoing Payment OUTPAY_RESPONSE_AWAI This stage is after authorization and transaction
Response Awaited TED falls in this stage when external payment
(Not be mapped on screen) integration is required as per payment mode in
transaction and integration is asynchronous and
transaction is waiting for response.
Limits Update LIMITS_UPDATE_EXCEPTIO This stage is after authorization and transaction
Exception N falls in this stage when limits utilization/release fails
due to technical error. The user can retry the
transaction after the technical error is resolved.
Finance Master POSTAUTH_UPDATE_EXCE This stage is after authorization and transaction
Update PTION falls in this stage when work table to main table
approval update fails due to technical errors. The
user can retry the transaction after the technical
error is resolved.
Instrument Update INSTRUMENT_UPDATE_EX This stage is after authorization and transaction
Exception CEPTION falls in this stage when update of linked invoice/PO
as financed/paid fails due to technical errors. The
user can retry the transaction after the technical
error is resolved.
Alerts Exception ALERTS_EXCEPTION This stage is after authorization and transaction
falls in this stage when alerts generation for
transaction fails due to technical errors. The user
can retry the transaction after the technical error is
resolved.
Recon Completion RECON_COMPLETION_EX This stage is after authorization and transaction
Exception CEPTION falls in this stage for settlement transactions when
payment is initiated through Finance Payment
Recon (FPR) and FIFO (First In First Out) is not
completed and status of the same cannot be found
due to technical errors. The user can retry the
transaction after the technical error is resolved.
Recon RECON_AUTHORIZATION_ This stage is after authorization and transaction
Authorization EXCEPTION falls in this stage for settlement transactions when
Exception payment is initiated through Finance Payment
Recon (FPR) and FIFO (First In First Out) is not
completed and status of recon of current finance
settlement is not updated due to technical errors.
The user can retry the transaction after the
technical error is resolved.

9-2
 Chapter 9

Table 9-1 (Cont.)

Stage Functional Activity Code Description

Recon Step RECON_STEP_AUTHORIZA This stage is after authorization and transaction
Authorization TION_EXCEPTION falls in this stage for settlement transactions when
Exception payment is initiated through Finance Payment
Recon (FPR) and FIFO (First In First Out) is not
completed and status of payment corresponding to
current finance settlement is not updated due to
technical errors. The user can retry the transaction
after the technical error is resolved.

Note:
Refer the Role section in Oracle Banking Security Management System User
Guide to understand procedure for creating roles and assigning activity to it.

9-3
A
Functional Activity Codes
Table A-1 List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Create Create Accounting Entries
IES_CREATE_SERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR View View Accounting Entries
IES_VIEW_SERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Authorize Authorize the Accounting Entries
IES_VIEW_AUTHORIZE record
_SERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Unlock Unlock and edit the Accounting
IES_VIEW_UPDATE_S Entries record
ERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Delete Delete the Accounting Entries
IES_VIEW_DELETE_S record
ERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Close Close the Accounting Entries
IES_VIEW_CLOSE_SE record
RVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Reopen Reopen a closed Accounting
IES_VIEW_REOPEN_S Entries record
ERVICE
Accounting Entries SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Copy Copy and create a new Accounting
IES_VIEW_COPY_SER Entries record
VICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Create Create Entry Codes
YCODE_CREATE_SER
VICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR View View Entry Codes
YCODE_VIEW_SERVIC
E
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Unlock Unlock and edit the Entry Codes
YCODE_VIEW_UPDAT record
E_SERVICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Authorize Authorize the Entry Codes record
YCODE_VIEW_AUTHO
RIZE_SERVICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Close Close the Entry Codes record
YCODE_VIEW_CLOSE
_SERVICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Reopen Reopen a closed Entry Codes
YCODE_VIEW_REOPE record
N_SERVICE
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Delete Delete an existing Entry Codes
YCODE_VIEW_DELET record
E_SERVICE

A-1
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Entry Codes SCF_FA_ACCNT_ENTR Copy Copy and create a new Entry
YCODE_VIEW_COPY_ Codes record
SERVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Create Create External Account Mapping
Mapping PP_CREATE_SERVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA View View External Account Mapping
Mapping PP_VIEW_SERVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Authorize Authorize the External Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_AUTHORIZE Mapping record
_SERVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Close Close the External Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_CLOSE_SER Mapping record
VICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Reopen Reopen a closed External Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_REOPEN_S Mapping record
ERVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Delete Delete an existing External
Mapping PP_VIEW_DELETE_SE Account Mapping record
RVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Unlock Unlock and edit the External
Mapping PP_VIEW_UPDATE_SE Account Mapping record
RVICE
External Account SCF_FA_EXT_ACC_MA Copy Copy and create a new External
Mapping PP_VIEW_COPY_SER Account Mapping record
VICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Create Create Internal Account Mapping
Mapping PP_CREATE_SERVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA View View Internal Account Mapping
Mapping PP_VIEW_SERVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Unlock Unlock and edit the Internal
Mapping PP_VIEW_UPDATE_SE Account Mapping record
RVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Authorize Authorize the Internal Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_AUTHORIZE Mapping record
_SERVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Close Close the Internal Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_CLOSE_SER Mapping record
VICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Reopen Reopen a closed Internal Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_REOPEN_S Mapping record
ERVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Delete Delete an existing Internal Account
Mapping PP_VIEW_DELETE_SE Mapping record
RVICE
Internal Account SCF_FA_INT_ACC_MA Copy Copy and create a new Internal
Mapping PP_VIEW_COPY_SER Account Mapping record
VICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Create Create an Accounting Role
_CREATE_SERVICE

A-2
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE View View Accounting Role
_VIEW_SERVICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Authorize Authorize the Accounting Role
_VIEW_AUTHORIZE_S record
ERVICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Close Close the Accounting Role record
_VIEW_CLOSE_SERVI
CE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Reopen Reopen a closed Accounting Role
_VIEW_REOPEN_SER record
VICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Unlock Unlock and edit the Accounting
_VIEW_UPDATE_SERV Role record
ICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Delete Delete an existing Accounting Role
_VIEW_DELETE_SERV record
ICE
Account Role SCF_FA_ACCNT_ROLE Copy Copy and create a new Accounting
_VIEW_COPY_SERVIC Role record
E
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Create Create Alert Contact Details
Details NTACTDETAILS_CREA
TE_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO View View Alert Contact Details
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_
SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Authorize Authorize the Alert Contact Details
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ record
AUTHORIZE_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Unlock Unlock and edit the Alert Contact
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ Details record
UPDATE_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Close Close the Alert Contact Details
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ record
CLOSE_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Reopen Reopen a closed Alert Contact
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ Details record
REOPEN_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Delete Delete an existing Alert Contact
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ Details record
DELETE_SERVICE
Alert Contact OBSCF_FA_ALERTCO Copy Copy and create a new Alert
Details NTACTDETAILS_VIEW_ Contact Details record
COPY_SERVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Create Create Alert Decisioning
SION_CREATE_SERVI
CE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI View View Alert Decisioning
SION_VIEW_SERVICE

A-3
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Unlock Unlock and edit the Alert
SION_VIEW_UPDATE_ Decisioning record
SERVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Authorize Authorize the Alert Decisioning
SION_VIEW_AUTH_SE record
RVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Delete Delete an existing Alert
SION_VIEW_DELETE_ Decisioning record
SERVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Close Close the Alert Decisioning record
SION_VIEW_CLOSE_S
ERVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Reopen Reopen a closed Alert Decisioning
SION_VIEW_REOPEN_ record
SERVICE
Alert Decisioning SCF_FA_ALERT_DECI Copy Copy and create a new Alert
SION_VIEW_COPY_SE Decisioning record
RVICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Create Create Alert Definition
_CREATE_SERVICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN View View Alert Definition
_VIEW_SERVICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Authorize Authorize the Alert Definition
_VIEW_AUTH_SERVIC record
E
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Delete Delete an existing Alert Definition
_VIEW_DELETE_SERV record
ICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Close Close the Alert Definition record
_VIEW_CLOSE_SERVI
CE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Reopen Reopen a closed Alert Definition
_VIEW_REOPEN_SER record
VICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Unlock Unlock and edit the Alert Definition
_VIEW_MODIFY_SERV record
ICE
Alert Definition SCF_FA_ALERT_DEFN Copy Copy and create a new Alert
_VIEW_COPY_SERVIC Definition record
E
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Create Create Charge Code
ER_CREATE_SERVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST View View Charge Code
ER_VIEW_SERVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Authorize Authorize the Charge Code record
ER_VIEW_AUTHORIZE
_SERVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Unlock Unlock and edit the Charge Code
ER_VIEW_UPDATE_SE record
RVICE

A-4
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Close Close the Charge Code record
ER_VIEW_CLOSE_SE
RVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Reopen Reopen a closed Charge Code
ER_VIEW_REOPEN_S record
ERVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Delete Delete an existing Charge Code
ER_VIEW_DELETE_SE record
RVICE
Charge Code OBSCF_FA_CHGMAST Copy Copy and create a new Charge
ER_VIEW_COPY_SER Code record
VICE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Create Create Charge Decisioning
Decisioning CREATE_SERVICE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ View View Charge Decisioning
Decisioning VIEW_SERVICE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Authorize Authorize the Charge Decisioning
Decisioning VIEW_AUTHORIZE_SE record
RVICE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Unlock Unlock and edit the Charge
Decisioning VIEW_AMEND_SERVIC Decisioning record
E
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Close Close the Charge Decisioning
Decisioning VIEW_CLOSE_SERVIC record
E
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Reopen Reopen a closed Charge
Decisioning VIEW_REOPEN_SERVI Decisioning record
CE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Delete Delete an existing Charge
Decisioning VIEW_DELETE_SERVI Decisioning record
CE
Charge OBSCF_FA_CHGDEC_ Copy Copy and create a new Charge
Decisioning VIEW_COPY_SERVICE Decisioning record
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Create Create Charge Preferential Pricing
Pricing PRC_CREATE_SERVIC
E
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF View View Charge Preferential Pricing
Pricing PRC_VIEW_SERVICE
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Authorize Authorize the Charge Preferential
Pricing PRC_VIEW_AUTHORIZ Pricing record
E_SERVICE
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Unlock Unlock and edit the Charge
Pricing PRC_VIEW_UPDATE_S Preferential Pricing record
ERVICE
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Close Close the Charge Preferential
Pricing PRC_VIEW_CLOSE_S Pricing record
ERVICE
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Reopen Reopen a closed Charge
Pricing PRC_VIEW_REOPEN_ Preferential Pricing record
SERVICE

A-5
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Delete Delete an existing Charge
Pricing PRC_VIEW_DELETE_S Preferential Pricing record
ERVICE
Charge Preferential OBSCF_FA_CHGPREF Copy Copy and create a new Charge
Pricing PRC_VIEW_COPY_SE Preferential Pricing record
RVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Create Create Charge Rule Maintenance
Maintenance _RULE_CREATE_SERV
ICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES View View Charge Rule Maintenance
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_SERVIC
E
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Close Close the Charge Rule
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_CLOSE_ Maintenance record
SERVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Reopen Reopen a closed Charge Rule
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_REOPE Maintenance record
N_SERVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Delete Delete an existing Charge Rule
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_DELETE Maintenance record
_SERVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Authorize Authorize the Charge Rule
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_AUTHO Maintenance record
RIZE_SERVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Unlock Unlock and edit the Charge Rule
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_MODIFY Maintenance record
_SERVICE
Charge Rule OBSCF_FA_CHARGES Copy Copy and create a new Charge
Maintenance _RULE_VIEW_COPY_S Rule Maintenance record
ERVICE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Create Create Insurance
CREATE_SERVICE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ View View Insurance
VIEW_SERVICE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Authorize Authorize the Insurance record
VIEW_AUTH_SERVICE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Close Close the Insurance record
VIEW_CLOSE_SERVIC
E
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Delete Delete an existing Insurance record
VIEW_DELETE_SERVI
CE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Reopen Reopen a closed Insurance record
VIEW_REOPEN_SERVI
CE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Unlock Unlock and edit the Insurance
VIEW_UPDATE_SERVI record
CE
Insurance SCF_FA_INSURANCE_ Copy Copy and create a new Insurance
VIEW_COPY_SERVICE record

A-6
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Create Create Interest Pricing
RC_CREATE_SERVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P View View Interest Pricing
RC_VIEW_SERVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Authorize Authorize the Interest Pricing
RC_VIEW_AUTHORIZE record
_SERVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Close Close the Interest Pricing record
RC_VIEW_CLOSE_SE
RVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Reopen Reopen a closed Interest Pricing
RC_VIEW_REOPEN_S record
ERVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Delete Delete an existing Interest Pricing
RC_VIEW_DELETE_SE record
RVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Unlock Unlock and edit the Interest Pricing
RC_VIEW_UPDATE_SE record
RVICE
Interest Pricing SCF_FA_INTEREST_P Copy Copy and create a new Interest
RC_VIEW_COPY_SER Pricing record
VICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Create Create Interest Pricing
Decisioning EC_CREATE_SERVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D View View Interest Pricing
Decisioning EC_VIEW_SERVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Authorize Authorize the Interest Rate
Decisioning EC_VIEW_AUTHORIZE Decisioning record
_SERVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Close Close the Interest Rate Decisioning
Decisioning EC_VIEW_CLOSE_SE record
RVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Reopen Reopen a closed Interest Rate
Decisioning EC_VIEW_REOPEN_S Decisioning record
ERVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Delete Delete an existing Interest Rate
Decisioning EC_VIEW_DELETE_SE Decisioning record
RVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Unlock Unlock and edit the Interest Rate
Decisioning EC_VIEW_UPDATE_SE Decisioning record
RVICE
Interest Rate SCF_FA_INTEREST_D Copy Copy and create a new Interest
Decisioning EC_VIEW_COPY_SER Rate Decisioning record
VICE
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_CREA Create Create Limits Structure
TE_SERVICE
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW View View Limits Structure
_SERVICE
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Authorize Authorize the Limits Structure
_AUTH_SERVICE record

A-7
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Reopen Reopen a closed Limits Structure
_REOPEN_SERVICE record
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Delete Delete an existing Limits Structure
_DELETE_SERVICE record
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Close Close the Limits Structure record
_CLOSE_SERVICE
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Unlock Unlock and edit the Limits
_UPDATE_SERVICE Structure record
Limits Structure SCF_FA_LIMITS_VIEW Copy Copy and create a new Limits
_COPY_SERVICE Structures record
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_C Create Create Product Parameter record
Parameters REATE_SERVICE
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI View View Product Parameter record
Parameters EW_SERVICE
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Authorize Authorize the Product Parameter
Parameters EW_AUTHORIZE_SER record
VICE
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Close Close the Product Parameter
Parameters EW_CLOSE_SERVICE record
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Delete Reopen a closed Product
Parameters EW_DELETE_SERVICE Parameter record
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Reopen Delete an existing Product
Parameters EW_REOPEN_SERVIC Parameter record
E
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Unlock Unlock and edit the Product
Parameters EW_AMEND_SERVICE Parameter record
Product SCF_FA_PRODUCT_VI Copy Copy and create a new Product
Parameters EW_COPY_SERVICE Parameter record
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_C Create Create Program Parameter record
Parameters REATE_SERVICE
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI View View Program Parameter record
Parameters EW_SERVICE
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Authorize Authorize the Program Parameter
Parameters EW_AUTHORIZE_SER record
VICE
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Close Close the Program Parameter
Parameters EW_CLOSE_SERVICE record
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Delete Reopen a closed Program
Parameters EW_DELETE_SERVICE Parameter record
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Reopen Delete an existing Program
Parameters EW_REOPEN_SERVIC Parameter record
E
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Unlock Unlock and edit the Program
Parameters EW_AMEND_SERVICE Parameter record
Program SCF_FA_PROGRAM_VI Copy Copy and create a new Program
Parameters EW_COPY_SERVICE Parameter record
System SCF_FA_SYS_PARAM_ View View System Parameter record
Parameters VIEW_SERVICE

A-8
 Appendix A

Table A-1 (Cont.) List of Functional Activity Codes

Screen Name/API Functional Activity Action Description

Name Code
System SCF_FA_SYS_PARAM_ Authorize Authorize the System Parameter
Parameters VIEW_AUTHORIZE_SE record
RVICE
System SCF_FA_SYS_PARAM_ Delete Delete the System Parameter
Parameters VIEW_DELETE_SERVI record
CE
System SCF_FA_SYS_PARAM_ Unlock Unlock and edit the System
Parameters VIEW_UPDATE_SERVI Parameter record
CE
Accounting Inquiry SCF_FA_ACC_TXN_EN Accounting Inquiry Menu for Accounting Inquiry
Q_VIEW_SERVICE
Charge Inquiry SCF_FA_CHARGES_E Charge Inquiry Menu for Charge Inquiry
NQUIRY_SERVICE
Finance Inquiry SCF_FA_FIN_ENQUIRY Finance Note Menu for Finance Note Inquiry
_SERVICE Inquiry
Message Inquiry SCFCM_FA_MESSAGE Message Inquiry Menu for Message Inquiry
_INQUIRY
Structure Limits SCF_FA_STRUCT_LIMI Structure Limits Menu for Structure Limits Inquiry
Inquiry TS_INQUIRY_SERVICE Inquiry
Structure Limits SCF_FA_STRUCT_LIMI Structure Limits Menu for Structure Limits Txn
Txn Inquiry TS_TXN_INQ_SERVIC Txn Inquiry Inquiry
E
Finance SCF_FA_OBSCF_SERV Finance Menu for Finance Amendment
Amendment ICE Amendment
Finance SCF_FA_OBSCFCM_S Finance Menu for Finance Amendment
Amendment ERVICE Amendment
Finance Settlement SCF_FA_FINANCE_SE Finance Settlement Menu for Finance Settlement
TTLE_CREATE_SERVI
CE
Transaction SCF_FA_TRANSACTIO Transaction Menu for Transaction Reversal
Reversal N_REVERSAL Reversal

A-9
Glossary

Glossary-1
Index
A Finance Disbursement, 3-1
Finance Inquiry, 7-6
Accounting Entries, 2-41 Finance Settlement, 4-1
Accounting Inquiry, 7-1 Functional Activity Codes, A-1
Accounting Maintenance, 2-35
Accounting Role, 2-36
Alert Contact Details, 2-52
I
Alert Decisioning, 2-57 Initiate Finance Amendment, 6-1
Alert Definition, 2-55 Initiate Finance Settlement, 4-1
Alerts Maintenance, 2-52 Initiate Transaction Reversal, 5-1
Inquiries, 7-1
C Insurance Maintenance, 2-84
Interest Maintenance, 2-87
Charge Code, 2-64 Interest Pricing, 2-88
Charge Decisioning, 2-70 Interest Rate Decisioning, 2-93
Charge Inquiry, 7-3 Internal Account Mapping, 2-48
Charge Preferential Pricing, 2-78
Charge Rule Maintenance, 2-67
Charges Maintenance, 2-64
L
Create Account Entry Code, 2-38 Limits Structure Maintenance, 2-97
Create Account Role, 2-36
Create Accounting Entries, 2-41
Create Alert Contact Details, 2-52 M
Create Alert Decisioning, 2-57 Message Inquiry, 7-7
Create Alert Definition, 2-55
Create Charge Code, 2-64
Create Charge Decisioning, 2-71 P
Create Charge Preferential Pricing, 2-79
Process Codes, 9-1
Create Charge Rule Maintenance, 2-67
Processing Amendment Task, 6-8
Create External Account Mapping, 2-46
Processing Disbursement Reversal Task, 5-5
Create Insurance, 2-84
Processing Disbursement Task, 3-1
Create Interest Pricing, 2-88
Processing Settlement Reversal Task, 5-26
Create Interest Rate Decisioning, 2-93
Processing Settlement Task, 4-5
Create Internal Account Mapping, 2-49
Product Parameters Maintenance, 2-11
Create Limits Structure, 2-97
Program Parameters Maintenance, 2-23
Create Product Parameters, 2-12
Create Program Parameters, 2-23
S
E Structure Limits Inquiry, 7-9
Structure Limits Txn Inquiry, 7-11
Entry Codes, 2-38
Supply Chain Finance, 1-1
External Account Mapping, 2-45
System Parameters Maintenance, 2-2

F
Finance Amendment, 6-1

Index-1
 Index

T View Charge Code, 2-66

View Charge Decisioning, 2-77
Transaction Reversal, 5-1 View External Account Mapping, 2-47
View Insurance, 2-86
View Interest Pricing, 2-91
V View Interest Rate Decisioning, 2-96
View Account Entries, 2-44 View Internal Account Mapping, 2-50
View Account Entry Code, 2-40 View Limits, 2-105
View Account Role, 2-37 View Preferential Pricing, 2-83
View Alert Contact Details, 2-53 View Product Parameters, 2-22
View Alert Decisioning, 2-62 View Program Parameters, 2-34, 2-69
View Alert Definition, 2-56 View System Parameters, 2-2

Index-2